A/C BLOWER MOTOR MALFUNCTION `97 ES 300

A/C BLOWER MOTOR MALFUNCTION `97 ES 300
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
A/C BLOWER MOTOR MALFUNCTION
Models:
’97 ES 300
July 17, 1998
Introduction
A Malfunction of the A/C blower motor may be caused by water intrusion into the blower
unit due to a poor seal between the windshield and the cowl top ventilation louver.
Water Entry & Flow
Depicted by Arrow
EPT Sealer
Windshield
Glass
Cowl Top
Ventilator
Louver
A’
A
A–A’ Cross
Section
To prevent this, the amount of caulking sponge sealant (EPT Sealer) applied behind the
cowl top ventilation louver has been increased. In addition, the shape of the louver has
been changed as shown in the illustrations below.
EPT Sealer
Deeper
Louver
10 mm
7 mm
Old Style A–
A’ Cross
Section
Affected
Vehicles
Parts
Information
Louver
Depth
New Style A–
A’ Cross
Section
S 1997 model year ES 300s produced before JT8BF22G*W0096000 at Tsutsumi plant
or before JT8BF22G*W5022600 at Kyushu plant.
OLD PART NUMBER
NEW PART NUMBER
PART NAME
55781–33140
Same
Lower Cowl Top Ventilator, RH
55782–33140
Same
Lower Cowl Top Ventilator, LH
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING
AC002–98
Title:
A/C BLOWER MOTOR MALFUNCTION – AC002–98
Warranty
Information
July 17, 1998
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
EL8001
R&R Blower Motor
0.6
87103–44020
T1
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s complaint.
Repair
Procedure
If evidence of water intrusion into the blower motor housing is found such as rusting of
the Blower Motor, perform the following operations:
1. Replace the Blower Motor (Refer to the Repair Manual for procedure).
2. Remove wiper arms and the hood to cowl top seal.
3. Replace the cowl top ventilator louver with new part.
4. Reinstall components in reverse order.
Page 2 of 2
T2
66 83
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
December 16, 2004
Introduction
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Models:
’90 – Current All Models
This service bulletin contains inspection procedures to more precisely confirm proper
operation of the following temperature sensors of the air conditioning system. Follow the
procedures in this service bulletin when inspecting these sensors. These contents will be
reflected in future repair manuals.
S Room Temperature Sensor
S Ambient Temperature Sensor
S Air Duct Sensor
S Evaporator Temperature Sensor
S Solar Sensor
S Room Humidity Sensor
Applicable
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
S All 1990 – Current model year Lexus vehicles.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 12
HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING
AC005-04
Title:
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
December 16, 2004
1. Inspect Room Temperature Sensor.
A. Measure the sensor resistance.
Resistance Value at 77°F
(25°C)
1700 +/– 85Ω
NOTE:
S Even slightly touching the sensor
may change the resistance value.
Be sure to hold the connector of
the sensor.
S When measuring, the sensor
temperature must be the same as
the ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the
resistance decreases.
Page 2 of 12
TEMPERATURE °F (°C)
SPECIFICATION kΩ
50 (10)
3.00 to 3.73
Resistance
kΩ
4.0
59 (15)
2.45 to 2.88
3.5
68 (20)
1.95 to 2.30
3.0
77 (25)
1.60 to 1.80
86 (30)
1.28 to 1.47
1.5
95 (35)
1.00 to 1.22
1.0
104 (40)
0.80 to 1.00
0.5
113 (45)
0.65 to 0.85
0.0
122 (50)
0.50 to 0.70
131 (55)
0.44 to 0.60
140 (60)
0.36 to 0.50
2.5
2.0
32
(0)
Max
Min
68
(20)
104
(40)
Temperature °F (°C)
140
(60)
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
2. Inspect Ambient
Temperature Sensor.
A. Measure the sensor resistance
according to the selected graph
(specification).
Resistance Value at 77°F
(25°C)
1700 +/– 85Ω
NOTE:
S Even slightly touching the sensor
may change the resistance value.
Be sure to hold the connector of
the sensor.
S When measuring, the sensor
temperature must be the same as
the ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the
resistance decreases.
TEMPERATURE °F (°C)
SPECIFICATION kΩ
50 (10)
3.00 to 3.73
Resistance
kΩ
4.0
59 (15)
2.45 to 2.88
3.5
68 (20)
1.95 to 2.30
3.0
77 (25)
1.60 to 1.80
86 (30)
1.28 to 1.47
1.5
95 (35)
1.00 to 1.22
1.0
104 (40)
0.80 to 1.00
0.5
113 (45)
0.65 to 0.85
0.0
122 (50)
0.50 to 0.70
131 (55)
0.44 to 0.60
140 (60)
0.36 to 0.50
2.5
2.0
Max
Min
32
(0)
68
(20)
104
(40)
140
(60)
Temperature °F (°C)
Page 3 of 12
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
3. Inspect Air Duct Sensor.
A. Measure the sensor resistance
according to the table and
graph (specification).
NOTE:
S Even slightly touching the sensor
may change the resistance value.
Be sure to hold the connector of
the sensor.
S When measuring, the sensor
temperature must be the same as
the ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the
resistance decreases.
Page 4 of 12
TEMPERATURE °F (°C)
SPECIFICATION kΩ
50 (10)
9.48 to 10.49
59 (15)
7.50 to 8.28
68 (20)
5.95 to 6.57
77 (25)
4.77 to 5.25
86 (30)
3.85 to 4.21
95 (35)
3.12 to 3.40
104 (40)
2.53 to 2.79
113 (45)
2.06 to 2.30
122 (50)
1.69 to 1.91
131 (55)
1.39 to 1.59
140 (60)
1.15 to 1.33
Resistance
kΩ
15.0
10.0
5.0
Max
Min
0.0
32
(0)
68
(20)
104
(40)
140
(60)
Temperature °F (°C)
176
(80)
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
4. Inspect Evaporator Temperature Sensor.
Select the appropriate graph (specification) using the following table.
NOTE:
Please inspect the sensors for model years not indicated by this bulletin, according to
the instructions in the applicable repair manual.
MODEL
MODEL YEAR
ES 300
PART NUMBER
GRAPH
1992 – 2001
88625–33070
2
2002 – 2003
88625–17130
2
2003
88625–33170
3
GS 300
1993 – 1997
88625–3A020
2
GS 300/400/430
1998 – 2002
88625–3A120
2
GX 470
2003 – 2005
Thermistor No. 1
88625–35050
3
Thermistor No. 2
88625–16210
2
IS 300
2000 – 2001
88625–48010
2
1990 – 1992
88625–32040
2
1993 – 1994
88625–50100
2
1995 – 2000
88625–50140
2
LS 430
2001 – 2005
88625–50160
2
LX 450
1996 – 1997
88625–60060
2
ES 300/330
LS 400
LX 470
RX 300
1998 – 2000
Thermistor No. 2
88625–60140
2
1998 – 2002
Thermistor No. 1
88625–60130
2
2003 – 2005
88625–47011
2
1998 – 2003
88625–48010
2
88625–48050
1
88625 48060
88625–48060
3
88625–32040
2
2004
RX 330
SC 300/400
COMMENTS
2004 – 2005
1991 – 2000
CBU
CBU
NAP
Page 5 of 12
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
A. Measure the sensor resistance according to the selected graph (specification).
NOTE:
S Even slightly touching the sensor may change the resistance value.
Be sure to hold the connector of the sensor.
S When measuring, the sensor temperature must be the same as the
ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
Graph 1:
TEMPERATURE °F (°C)
SPECIFICATION kΩ
14 (–10)
7.30 to 9.10
23 (–5)
5.65 to 6.95
32 (0)
4.40 to 5.35
41 (5)
3.40 to 4.15
50 (10)
2.70 to 3.25
59 (15)
2.14 to 2.58
68 (20)
1.71 to 2.05
77 (25)
1.38 to 1.64
86 (30)
1.11 to 1.32
Resistance
kΩ
12.0
11.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
–4
(–20)
Max
Min
32
(0)
68
(20)
104
(40)
Temperature °F (°C)
Graph 2:
TEMPERATURE °F (°C)
SPECIFICATION kΩ
14 (–10)
7.40 to 9.20
23 (–5)
5.65 to 7.00
32 (0)
4.35 to 5.40
41 (5)
3.40 to 4.20
50 (10)
2.68 to 3.30
59 (15)
2.10 to 2.60
68 (20)
1.66 to 2.10
77 (25)
1.32 to 1.66
86 (30)
1.05 to 1.35
Resistance
kΩ
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
–4
(–20)
Max
Min
32
(0)
68
(20)
Temperature °F (°C)
Page 6 of 12
104
(40)
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
Graph 3:
TEMPERATURE °F (°C)
SPECIFICATION kΩ
14 (–10)
8.00 to 10.00
23 (–5)
6.15 to 7.65
32 (0)
4.75 to 5.85
41 (5)
3.70 to 4.55
50 (10)
2.91 to 3.55
59 (15)
2.32 to 2.80
68 (20)
1.85 to 2.22
77 (25)
1.48 to 1.77
86 (30)
1.20 to 1.43
Resistance
kΩ
12.0
11.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
–4
(–20)
Max
Min
32
(0)
68
(20)
104
(40)
Temperature °F (°C)
Page 7 of 12
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
5. Inspect Solar Sensor.
Four types of solar sensors are used on Lexus vehicles depending on the vehicle
specifications. The inspection procedure for each type of sensor differs from the
others. Select the appropriate inspection procedure from the table below according to
vehicle specifications and perform the inspection.
EQUIPPED WITH AUTOMATIC
LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
A/C SYSTEM WITH RIGHT/LEFT
INDEPENDENT TEMPERATURE CONTROL
INSPECTION
PROCEDURE
No
No
A
No
Yes
B
Yes
Yes
C
Yes
No
D
Procedure A:
a. Disconnect the solar
sensor connector.
Lock
b. Measure the resistance between
terminals 1 and 2 of the solar
sensor under the
following conditions:
S Cover the sensor with a cloth
to avoid direct light.
S Expose the sensor to light
from a distance of 300 mm
(11.81 in.) or less with an
inspection light.
NOTE:
S Terminal 1 of the sensor is always on
the right, when the lock is facing up.
S When using an analog tester, connect
the positive (+) lead to terminal 2 and
negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the
solar sensor.
HINT:
If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for
an inspection light.
Standard:
Page 8 of 12
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
When the sensor is covered with a cloth
(to avoid direct light)
Infinite ohms
When the sensor is exposed to light
Less than infinite resistance
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
Procedure B:
a. Disconnect the solar
sensor connector.
Lock
b. Measure the resistance between
terminals 2 and 3 of the solar
sensor under the
following conditions:
S Cover the sensor with a cloth
to avoid direct light.
S Expose the sensor to light
from a distance of 300 mm
(11.81 in.) or less with an
inspection light.
NOTE:
When using an analog tester, connect
the positive (+) lead to terminal 3 and
negative (–) lead to terminal 2 of the
solar sensor.
HINT:
If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for
an inspection light.
Standard:
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
When the sensor is covered with a cloth
(to avoid direct light)
Infinite ohms
When the sensor is exposed to light
Less than infinite resistance
Page 9 of 12
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
Procedure C:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Measure the voltage between
terminals TSR (+) and CLTE (–)
of the connector under the
following conditions:
TSR
S Cover the sensor with a cloth
to avoid direct light.
CLTE
S Expose the sensor to light
from a distance of 300 mm
(11.81 in.) or less with an
inspection light.
HINT:
S If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light
for an inspection light.
S Do not disconnect the solar sensor connector.
Standard:
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
When the sensor is covered with a cloth
(to avoid direct light)
Below 0.8 V
When the sensor is exposed to light
4.3 +/– 0.3 V
c. Measure the voltage between
terminals TSL (+) and CLTE (–)
of the connector under the
following conditions:
TSL
S Cover the sensor with a cloth
to avoid direct light.
S Expose the sensor to light
from a distance of 300 mm
(11.81 in.) or less with an
inspection light.
CLTE
HINT:
S If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light
for an inspection light.
S Do not disconnect the solar sensor connector.
Standard:
Page 10 of 12
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
When the sensor is covered with a cloth
(to avoid direct light)
Below 0.8 V
When the sensor is exposed to light
4.3 +/– 0.3 V
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
Procedure D:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Using the tester, measure the
voltage between terminals
TSD (+) and CLTE (–) of the
connector under the
following conditions:
S Cover the sensor with a cloth
to avoid direct light.
TSD
CLTE
S Expose the sensor to light
from a distance of 300 mm
(11.81 in.) or less with an
inspection light.
HINT:
S If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light
for an inspection light.
S Do not disconnect the solar sensor connector.
Standard:
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
When the sensor is covered with a cloth
(to avoid direct light)
Below 0.8 V
When the sensor is exposed to light
4.3 +/– 0.3 V
Page 11 of 12
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM – AC005-04
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
December 16, 2004
6. Inspect Room Humidity Sensor.
Measure the humidity and output
voltage of the humidity sensor when
the sensor is installed on the vehicle
and the temperature at the humidity
sensor position (room temperature
sensor position) is 77°F (25°C).
If the output voltage is within the
specifications according to the graph
and table below, the sensor is normal.
VO
GND
HINT:
For the inspection procedure of the
room temperature sensor, refer to
“Room Temperature Sensor Inspection
Procedure” in this bulletin.
A. Turn the ignition switch to the
ON position.
B. Measure the voltage between
terminal VO (3) and GND (2) of
the room humidity sensor.
C. Measure the humidity and voltage
when the room temperature
(humidity sensor position) is 77°F
(25°C). According to the result,
determine whether the sensor is
normal or not.
HUMIDITY (% RH)
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
AT 77°F (25°C)
10
0.70 to 1.08 V
20
0.72 to 1.57 V
30
1.13 to 1.95 V
40
1.61 to 2.24 V
50
1.99 to 2.46 V
60
2.26 to 2.66 V
70
2.48 to 2.85 V
80
2.68 to 3.04 V
90
2.87 to 3.05 V
Resistance
kΩ
3.50
3.00
2.50
2.00
Page 12 of 12
Max
1.50
1.00
Min
0.50
0.00
32
(0)
68
(20)
104
(40)
140
(60)
176
(80)
Temperature °F (°C)
212
(100)
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
LEXUS DINGHY" TOWING GUIDE
Models:
All Models
March 17, 2000
Introduction
The following chart indicates which Lexus vehicles can be Dinghy towed (towed with four
wheels on the ground) behind a Motorhome.
CAUTION:
Dinghy towing a vehicle behind a Motorhome requires special towing equipment and
accessories. Please see your Motorhome Manufacturer / Service Outlet for
recommended towing equipment.
Applicable
Vehicles
S All Models
DINGHY TOWABLE
SPEED/DISTANCE
LIMITS
YEAR
MODEL
1990–2000
LS 400
1992–2000
SC 400/300
1993–2000
GS 400/300
Not Towable
–
1992–1998
ES 300
Not Towable
–
1999–2000
ES 300
Yes
55 mph / 200 miles
1999–2000
RX 300 2WD
Yes
55 mph / 200 miles
1999–2000
RX 300 4WD
Yes
55 mph / 200 miles
1996–1997
LX 450
Not Towable
–
1998–2000
LX 470
Not Towable
–
M/T
A/T
Not Towable
Not
Towable
–
Not
Towable
–
NOTE:
After “Dinghy” Towing, or at the recommended distance limits, let the Engine idle for
more than 3 minutes before operating the vehicle or resuming towing.
NOTE:
Vehicles that are Dinghy towable will not sustain internal damage to the transmission
or transfer components, as long as speed/distance limits are observed. The
transmission must be placed in the “neutral” position when Dinghy towing. Dinghy
towing these vehicles does not eliminate the possibility of damage to other vehicle
systems (Body, Chassis, Electrical Systems, etc.).
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ACCESSORIES
AX001–00
Title:
RETRO-FIT INTERNAL TRUNK
RELEASE KITS
Models:
ES 300, GS 400/300, LS 400 & SC 400/300
May 25, 2001
TSIB REVISION NOTICE:
The parts information updated in this TSIB is red and underlined.
Introduction
In order to respond to requests of our valued customers, we are offering Retro–Fit
Internal Trunk Release Kits. These kits allow the trunk to be opened from the inside in
case of entrapment.
Applicable
Vehicles
MODEL
MODEL CODE
MODEL YEAR
# CLAMPS
VCV10, MCV10
1992 – 1996
4
MCV20
1997 – 2000
4
GS 300
JZS147
1994 – 1997
4
GS 400/300
UZS160, JZS160
1998 – 2000
4
UCF10
1993 – 1994
4
UCF20
1995 – 2000
4
UZZ30, JZZ31
1992 – 2000
4
ES 300
LS 400
SC 400/300
Parts
Information
Installation
Procedure
Warranty
Information
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
–
64640–33030
Trunk Release
–
90464–00551
Clamp
–
MDC 00237–LUTRI–01
Installation Instructions
Order the appropriate trunk release, at least as many clamps as listed above, and a set
of installation instructions. Follow the installation procedure detailed in the installation
instructions. Installation time is 0.7 hours.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ACCESSORIES
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
AX001-01
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
LEXUS DINGHY" TOWING GUIDE
Models:
All Models
March 19, 1999
Introduction
The following chart indicates which Lexus vehicles can be Dinghy towed (towed with four
wheels on the ground) behind a Motorhome.
CAUTION:
Dinghy towing a vehicle behind a Motorhome requires special towing equipment and
accessories. Please see your Motorhome Manufacturer / Service Outlet for
recommended towing equipment.
Affected
Vehicles
S All Models
DINGHY TOWABLE
SPEED/DISTANCE
LIMITS
YEAR
MODEL
1990 – 1999
LS 400
Not Towable
–
1992 – 1999
SC 300
Not Towable
–
1992 – 1999
SC 400
Not Towable
–
1993 – 1999
GS 300
Not Towable
–
1992 – 1998
ES 300
Not Towable
–
1999
ES 300
1996 – 1997
LX 450
Not Towable
–
1998 – 1999
LX 470
Not Towable
–
1999
RX 300 2WD
N/A
Yes
55 mph / 200 miles
1999
RX 300 4WD
N/A
Yes
55 mph / 200 miles
M/T
A/T
N/A
Yes
55 mph / 200 miles
NOTE:
After “Dinghy“ Towing, let the Engine idle for more than 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Vehicles that are Dinghy towable will not sustain internal damage to the transmission
or transfer components. The transmission must be placed in the “neutral“ position
when Dinghy towing. Dinghy towing these vehicles does not eliminate the possibility
of damage to other vehicle systems (Body, Chassis, Electrical Systems, etc.).
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ACCESSORIES
AX003–99
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
Models:
All ’94 through ’98 models, and ’99 RX 300
April 24, 1998
BODY
BO001–98
Title:
TSB Update Notice:
The information contained in this TSB updates BO007–97 dated October 24, 1997.
Introduction
Lexus customers who find it necessary to increase the length of their seat belts may
obtain Seat Belt Extenders at no cost through their local Lexus dealer.
S The extender is available in 6 inch, 9 inch, 12 inch, 15 inch and 18 inch lengths.
S The extender is available only in black.
S Owners are informed of the seat belt extender availability through the Lexus Owner’s
Manual included in each vehicle.
The customer (individual requiring the extender) must visit a Lexus dealership to have the
required measurements made and to complete the seat belt extender worksheet. The
worksheet will allow the proper fitting and selection of a seat belt extender for the
customer. The dealership personnel should then determine the applicable part number
and place a Critical Order through the TDN Parts Network.
The dealership service department should complete the affixed Seat Belt Extender Label
and review the “owner instruction sheet” with the customer. The dealership should give a
copy of the completed worksheet to the customer and keep the original in the customer’s
file.
To assure utmost owner satisfaction, it is recommended that a dealership designate one
person to coordinate all activities related to the seat belt extender issue.
From past sales history, it is recommended that dealerships do not stock Seat belt
extenders due to low demand and the need for customer fitting.
This bulletin contains the following information:
Procedure and Flow Chart ................... Page 2
Application Chart and Notes.................Page 3
Part Number Information .......................Page 3
Owner Instructions .................................Page 4
Seat Belt Extender Worksheet ..............Page 5
Affected
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
S All Lexus models, 1994 through 1998 model years, and 1999 RX 300.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not applicable to warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 5
SELT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO001-98
Procedure
August 24, 1998
1. Owner requests a seat belt extender from dealer.
2. Dealer verifies the need for a seat belt extender and obtains a current copy of this
TSB and copies the worksheet.
3. Dealer measures the customer and completes the worksheet. Dealer determines the
correct part number and places a Critical Order for the part through the TDN Parts
Network.
4. Dealer receives seat belt extender and calls the customer in to check fit of the part.
5. If the seat belt extender fit is good, dealership personnel completes the customer
information label on the part, explains usage of the part, and gives the customer a
copy of the completed worksheet.
6. Dealer places a copy of the completed worksheet in the customer’s records.
PARTS
SUPPLY
DEALER
MEASURE
CUSTOMER
&
COMPLETE
WORKSHEET
PLACE
CRITICAL
ORDER
THROUGH
TDN
SHIP SEAT
BELT
EXTENDER
TO
DEALER
TEST FIT
CUSTOMER
WITH PART
COMPLETE
LABEL AND
ADVISE
OWNER
RECEIVE
COPY OF
WORKSHEET
& USE
EXTENDER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN
CUSTOMER
RECORDS
EXTENDER FLOW CHART
Sample Seat
Belt Extender
Label
CAUTION
Driver
Page 2 of 5
OWNER
DEALER
Passenger
Front
Rear
SELT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO001-98
Front Seat Belt
Extender
Applications
August 24, 1998
FRONT SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION
MODEL
’98
’97
’96
’95
’94
LS 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N–3
N–3
N–3
N–3
GS 400
R–5
GS 300
SC 400/300
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300
R–5
R–5
K–4
K–4
K–4
LX 450
N/A
R–3
R–3
N/A
N/A
LX 470
K–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
RX 300 (’99 MY)
R–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Rear Seat Belt
Extender
Applications
REAR SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION
MODEL
’98
’97
’96
’95
’94
LS 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
K–4
K–4
K–4
K–4
GS 400
K–5
GS 300
SC 400/300
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300 (Right & Left)
R–5
R–5
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300 (Center)
R–3
R–3*
N/A
N/A
N/A
LX 450
N/A
K–4**
K–4**
N/A
N/A
LX 470
K–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
RX 300 (’99 MY)
R–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NOTICE:
* The extender must NOT be used for the center rear seat belt (except on ’97 and ’98
model ES 300s as noted in the chart).
** Includes third seat application.
Parts
Information
PART NUMBER PREFIX: 73399–
SERIES
LENGTH
6 INCH
9 INCH
12 INCH
15 INCH
18 INCH
K–4
–33010
–33020
–33030
–33040
–33050
K–5
–35010
–35020
–35030
–35040
–35050
N–3
–20011
–20021
–20031
–20041
–20051
R–3
–50010
–50020
–50030
–50040
–50050
R–5
–16060
–16070
–16080
–16090
–16100
Page 3 of 5
SELT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO001-98
Owner
Instructions
August 24, 1998
Failure to follow the recommendations indicated below could result in less effectiveness
of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle collision, causing personal injury.
The seat belt extender must not be used:
a. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
b. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was
provided.
c. When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
locking retractor), make sure the retractor is locked when in use.
If your seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough, a
personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required
length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper
measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION:
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in reduced effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in
case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.
S Never use the seat belt extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt
without it.
S Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a
different vehicle, or for another person or at a different seating position than the
one originally intended for.
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle–release buttons of the
extender and the seat belt are both
facing outward as shown.
Seat Belt Release
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle–release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender
itself.
Seat Belt Extender
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 4 of 5
SELT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO001-98
August 24, 1998
SEAT BELT EXTENDER WORKSHEET
PLEASE COPY THIS ORIGINAL WORKSHEET FOR EACH EXTENDER NEEDED
CAUTIONS:
S
S
S
To minimize the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident, the seat belt extender must only be
used:
1 By the person for whom it was provided
2 In the seat position for which it was provided
The seat belt extender must never be used with any child safety seats.
When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic locking retractor),
make sure the retractor is locked when extender belt is in use.
DEALER
DEALER CODE
SEAT BELT EXTENDER APPLICATION
DEALER NAME
APPLICANT
APPLICANT NAME
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
CITY & STATE
EMPLOYEE NAME
MODEL YEAR
ZIP
CITY & STATE
BODY TYPE
SEATING POSITION
ZIP
PHONE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
DIRECTIONS FOR DETERMINING PROPER EXTENDER LENGTH
1.
2.
Place the seat in the position the applicant normally uses
With applicant in the seat, wearing thickest coat expected to be worn, pull belt all the way out and try to
buckle belt
S If the belt latches into buckle and feels comfortable against upper chest area, an extender is not
needed.
S
S
3.
4.
5.
6.
If belt does not buckle continue with step 3
If buckle latches but belt has no slack remaining, continue with step 3
Measure distance between applicant’s navel and seat belt buckle (dimension A) and enter on worksheet
With belt all the way out, measure distance between latch tip and buckle tip (dimension B) and enter on
worksheet
NOTE: If belt latches but there is no slack enter zero as dimension B
Subtract dimension B from dimension A and record number in check number box on worksheet
Seat belt extender length is dimension B rounded up to next extender length (without exceeding check
number)
NOTE: If extender length exceeds check number, an extender can not be provided to the customer
Dimension A:
NAVEL TO BUCKLE
Dimension B:
LATCH TO BUCKLE
Navel
Latch
Buckle
A
B
Buckle
SEAT BELT EXTENDER CALCULATION
DIMENSION A:
DIMENSION B:
CHECK NUMBER:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER AUTHORIZATION
S The same seat belt extender can be used for right and left seating applications. Each seat belt extender will have
a label identifying the owner, VIN and seating position. Seat belt extenders are available only in black.
S Applicant’s Signature: _________________________________________
Date: ______________________
(Actual user of seat belt extender)
Page 5 of 5
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET
Models:
’97 – ’00 ES 300 & ’99 – ’00 RX 300
June 9, 2000
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
Parts
Information
To improve the appearance of the shoulder belt anchor, the following procedure has been
developed.
S 1999 – 2000 model year ES 300
S 1999 – 2000 model year RX 300
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY
N/A
73205–48010
Tape Set, Shoulder Belt Anchor
1
NOTE: The above tape set contains the fluorocarbon resin tape (2 pieces) and wire (diameter 0.3–0.5 mm).
Warranty
Information
OPCODE
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
BD0013
ES 300
0.3
73220–331**–**
BD0013
RX 300
Clean the RH & LH
Shoulder Belt Anchor
0.3
73220–480**–**
T1
T2
61
99
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Installation
Procedure
1. Clean the shoulder belt anchor.
A. Pull out the seat belt about 300
mm and attach a clip as shown in
the illustration.
HINT:
Preventing the seat belt from retraction
with a clip will make the following
work easier.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 3
BODY
BO003–00
Title:
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET – BO003–00
Installation
Procedure
(Continued)
B. Put the wire (from the kit) through
the hole of the shoulder belt
anchor.
C. Pull both ends of the wire with
your hand. Shave off the dirt on
the shoulder belt anchor by
moving the wire several times as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION:
Wrap the wire ends around a pencil or
other common item to prevent the wire
from hurting your hand.
NOTE:
Remove the dirt completely. Otherwise,
the fluorocarbon resin tape may not
adhere properly.
2. Install the fluorocarbon resin tape.
A. Remove the smaller clear film
backing from the fluorocarbon
resin tape.
B. Place the fluorocarbon resin tape
with its adhesive side away from
the seat belt as shown in the
illustration.
C. While pulling up on the seat belt,
pull the fluorocarbon resin tape
through the hole of the shoulder
belt anchor. Match the center of
the tape with the top of the
shoulder belt anchor.
D. Secure the lower half of the
fluorocarbon resin tape to the
back side of the shoulder belt
anchor.
Page 2 of 3
June 9, 2000
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET – BO003–00
Installation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 9, 2000
E. Remove the remaining half of the
clear film from the fluorocarbon
resin tape and secure the tape on
the outside of the shoulder belt
anchor.
NOTE:
S Be sure to secure the fluorocarbon
resin tape along all edges.
S Pay attention not to make any
wrinkle or slack in the fluorocarbon
resin tape.
S Do not reuse removed fluorocarbon
resin tape.
F. Remove the clip from the seat belt.
G. By pulling the seat belt up and
down several times as shown in
the illustration, securely affix the
fluorocarbon resin tape.
3. Affix the fluorocarbon resin tape on
the shoulder belt anchor on the other
side following the same procedure.
NOTE:
If the seat belt requires cleaning to
remove dirt, only use a neutral
detergent or lukewarm water to clean.
Use the seat belt only after it is
completely dried.
Page 3 of 3
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
1999 LEXUS SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
Models:
All ’95 through ’99 models
July 3, 1998
Introduction
Lexus customers who find it necessary to
increase the length of their seat belts may
obtain Seat Belt Extenders at no cost
through their local Lexus dealer.
BODY
BO003–98
Title:
Seat Belt
S The extender is available in 6 inch, 9 inch,
12 inch, 15 inch and 18 inch lengths.
S The extender is available only in black.
Extender
S Owners are informed of the seat belt
extender availability through the Lexus
Owner’s Manual included in each vehicle.
The customer (individual requiring the extender) must visit a Lexus dealership to have the
required measurements made and to complete the seat belt extender worksheet. The
worksheet will allow the proper fitting and selection of a seat belt extender for the
customer. The dealership personnel should then determine the applicable part number
and place a Critical Order through the TDN Parts Network.
The dealership service department should complete the affixed Seat Belt Extender Label
and review the “owner instruction sheet” with the customer. The dealership should give a
copy of the completed worksheet to the customer and keep the original in the customer’s
file.
To assure utmost owner satisfaction, it is recommended that a dealership designate one
person to coordinate all activities related to the seat belt extender issue.
From past sales history, it is recommended that dealerships do not stock Seat belt
extenders due to low demand and the need for customer fitting.
This bulletin contains the following information:
Procedure and Flow Chart .................... Page
Application Chart and Notes................. Page
Part Number Information ....................... Page
Owner Instructions ................................. Page
Seat Belt Extender Worksheet .............. Page
Affected
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
2
3
3
4
5
S All 1995 through 1999 model year Lexus vehicles.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 5
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1995–1999 – BO003–98
Procedure
July 3, 1998
1. Owner requests a seat belt extender from dealer.
2. Dealer verifies the need for a seat belt extender and obtains a current copy of this
TSB and copies the worksheet.
3. Dealer measures the customer and completes the worksheet. Dealer determines the
correct part number and places a Critical Order for the part through the TDN Parts
Network.
4. Dealer receives seat belt extender and calls the customer in to check fit of the part.
5. If the seat belt extender fit is good, dealership personnel completes the customer
information label on the part, explains usage of the part, and gives the customer a
copy of the completed worksheet.
6. Dealer places a copy of the completed worksheet in the customer’s records.
PARTS
SUPPLY
DEALER
MEASURE
CUSTOMER
&
COMPLETE
WORKSHEET
PLACE
CRITICAL
ORDER
THROUGH
TDN
SHIP SEAT
BELT
EXTENDER
TO
DEALER
TEST FIT
CUSTOMER
WITH PART
COMPLETE
LABEL AND
ADVISE
OWNER
RECEIVE
COPY OF
WORKSHEET
& USE
EXTENDER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN
CUSTOMER
RECORDS
EXTENDER FLOW CHART
Sample Seat
Belt Extender
Label
CAUTION
Driver
Page 2 of 5
OWNER
DEALER
Passenger
Front
Rear
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1995–1999 – BO003–98
Front Seat Belt
Extender
Applications
July 3, 1998
FRONT SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION
MODEL
’99
’98
’97
’96
’95
LS 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
GS 400/300
R–5
R–5
N–3
N–3
N–3
SC 400/300
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300
R–5
R–5
R–5
K–4
K–4
LX 470/450
K–5
K–5
R–3
R–3
N/A
RX 300
R–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Rear Seat Belt
Extender
Applications
REAR SEAT – EXTENDER APPLICATION
MODEL
’99
’98
’97
’96
’95
LS 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
GS 400/300
K–5
K–5
K–4
K–4
K–4
SC 400/300
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300 (Right & Left)
R–5
R–5
R–5
R–3
R–3
ES 300 (Center)
R–3
R–3
R–3*
N/A
N/A
LX 470/450
K–5
K–5
K–4**
K–4**
N/A
RX 300
R–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NOTICE:
*
The extender must NOT be used for the center rear seat belt (except on 1997
through 1999 model ES 300s as noted in the chart).
**
Includes third seat application.
Parts
Information
PART NUMBER PREFIX: 73399–
SERIES
LENGTH
6 INCH
9 INCH
12 INCH
15 INCH
18 INCH
K–4
–33010
–33020
–33030
–33040
–33050
K–5
–35010
–35020
–35030
–35040
–35050
N–3
–20011
–20021
–20031
–20041
–20051
R–3
–50010
–50020
–50030
–50040
–50050
R–5
–16060
–16070
–16080
–16090
–16100
Page 3 of 5
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1995–1999 – BO003–98
Owner
Instructions
July 3, 1998
Failure to follow the recommendations indicated below could result in less effectiveness
of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle collision, causing personal injury.
The seat belt extender must not be used:
a. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
b. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was
provided.
c. When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
locking retractor), make sure the retractor is locked when in use.
If your seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough, a
personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required
length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper
measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION:
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in reduced effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in
case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.
S Never use the seat belt extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt
without it.
S Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a
different vehicle, or for another person or at a different seating position than the
one originally intended for.
S The seat belt extender must never be used with any child safety seats.
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle–release buttons of the
extender and the seat belt are both
facing outward as shown.
Seat Belt Release
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle–release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender
itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 4 of 5
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1995–1999 – BO003–98
July 3, 1998
SEAT BELT EXTENDER WORKSHEET
PLEASE COPY THIS ORIGINAL WORKSHEET FOR EACH EXTENDER NEEDED
CAUTIONS:
S
S
S
To minimize the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident, the seat belt extender must only be used:
1 By the person for whom it was provided
2 In the seat position for which it was provided
The seat belt extender must never be used with any child safety seats.
When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic locking retractor), make
sure the retractor is locked when extender belt is in use.
DEALER
DEALER CODE
SEAT BELT EXTENDER APPLICATION
DEALER NAME
APPLICANT
APPLICANT NAME
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
CITY & STATE
EMPLOYEE NAME
MODEL YEAR
ZIP
CITY & STATE
ZIP
BODY TYPE
SEATING POSITION
PHONE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
DIRECTIONS FOR DETERMINING PROPER EXTENDER LENGTH
1.
2.
S
S
S
3.
4.
5.
6.
Place the seat in the position the applicant normally uses
With applicant in the seat, wearing thickest coat expected to be worn, pull belt all the way out and try to
buckle belt
If the belt latches into buckle and feels comfortable against upper chest area, an extender is not needed.
If belt does not buckle continue with step 3
If buckle latches but belt has no slack remaining, continue with step 3
Measure distance between applicant’s navel and seat belt buckle (dimension A) and enter on worksheet
With belt all the way out, measure distance between latch tip and buckle tip (dimension B) and enter on
worksheet
NOTE: If belt latches but there is no slack enter zero as dimension B
Subtract dimension B from dimension A and record number in check number box on worksheet
Seat belt extender length is dimension B rounded up to next extender length (without exceeding check
number)
NOTE: If extender length exceeds check number, an extender can not be provided to the customer
Dimension A:
NAVEL TO BUCKLE
Dimension B:
LATCH TO BUCKLE
A
Navel
B
Buckle
Latch
Buckle
SEAT BELT EXTENDER CALCULATION
DIMENSION A:
DIMENSION B:
CHECK NUMBER:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER AUTHORIZATION
S The same seat belt extender can be used for right and left seating applications. Each seat belt extender will have
a label identifying the owner, VIN and seating position. Seat belt extenders are available only in black.
S Applicant’s Signature: _________________________________________
Date: ______________________
(Actual user of seat belt extender)
Page 5 of 5
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
July 29, 2002
Introduction
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TOP STRAP
BRACKET INSTALLATION
Models:
’90 – ’00 All Models
Child restraint seat top strap bracket installation procedures are provided to supplement
the Owner’s Manual. Beginning with 2001 models, the top strap brackets are factory
installed.
NOTE:
S The child restraint seat top strap assembly is not available as a service part.
Contact the child restraint seat manufacturer for recommended top strap information,
top strap to child restraint seat installation instructions, and top strap retailers.
S The top strap brackets can only be installed on vehicles that have nuts welded in
place by the factory. The locations of these nuts can be found in the Owner’s Manual
(for most 1990 and newer models). Lexus does not recommend modifying vehicles
that do not have nuts welded in place by the factory. All LX 450 and LX 470 vehicles,
prior to 2001 model year, may not have these nuts welded in by the factory.
Top Strap
Top Strap Bracket
Applicable
Vehicles
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
S 1990 – 2000 model year vehicles, all models.
PART NUMBER
PART NAME
73709–12010
Bracket Sub–Assembly (Bracket, Bolt, 10 mm Spacer, and Washers)
04731–22012
CRS Kit (two Bolts [15 mm, 30 mm],
three Spacers [5 mm, 10 mm, 15 mm], and Locking Clip)
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 4
BODY
BO004-02
Title:
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TOP STRAP BRACKET INSTALLATION – BO004-02
Installation
Procedure
July 29, 2002
Child Restraint Seat Top Strap Bracket Installation
Obtain the exact year and vehicle model Lexus Owner’s Manual before beginning
installation.
1. Confirm with the customer which seat
location(s) they will be installing the
child restraint seat. The Owner’s
Manual seat section provides an
illustration showing available top strap
bracket location(s). The illustration
page in the Owner’s Manual is
provided on page 4 of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Determine which kit parts are needed
for each specific child seat location, by
referring to page 4 of this bulletin.
Bolt
Anchor
Bracket
345 mm
(13.6 in.)
Spacer
100 mm
(4.0 in.)
185 mm
(7.3 in.)
Example of 1999 ES 300 Showing Three (3)
Available Bracket Locations
2. Remove a 20 mm diameter area of
the carpet or trim material above the
bracket mounting location. In some
vehicles, a 20 mm circle is already
pre–cut into the interior trim material.
Once the interior trim material is
removed, the nuts welded in by the
factory should be visible.
Example of Pre–Cut Circle in Package Tray Finisher
3. If a 5 mm or 15 mm spacer is
specified, remove the red lock washer
from the Bracket Sub–Assembly
(P/N 73709–12010) and remove the
10 mm spacer. Assure the red lock
washer is re–installed onto the bolt.
If a 5 mm spacer is needed, use the
15 mm bolt from the CRS Kit
(P/N 04731–22012).
Bolt
Wave Washer
Bracket
Nylon Washer
Spacer
(5/10/15 mm)
Red Lock Washer
Page 2 of 4
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TOP STRAP BRACKET INSTALLATION – BO004-02
Installation
Procedure
(Continued)
4. Install the bracket assembly,
according to the directions in the
Owner’s Manual. Tighten the bolt to
16.5 – 24.7 N–m, (1.68 – 2.52 kgf–m,
12.2 – 18.2 ft–lbf).
July 29, 2002
Top Strap Installed
S Assure the top strap is attached
to the child seat, according to the
child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Bracket
Assembly
Installed
Body
Nut Welded
in Place
S Assure the child seat is installed
in the vehicle according to the
Lexus Owner’s Manual (seat
section).
Installation
Reference
Information
Owner’s Manual Installation Reference Information
Page 4 of this bulletin is a reference chart containing:
S Owner’s Manual page(s) that provide the illustration showing available top strap
bracket location(s). The information goes back to 1990 model year. 2001 models
and newer already had the bracket installed by the factory.
S Installation notes, such as bracket spacer sizes for each specific child seat location.
EXAMPLE:
This cell contains information on the 1997 ES300
OWNER’S
MANUAL
ES 300
pg 89–90
a
1997
Refer to this page in the Owner’s Manual to find the illustration showing
available top strap bracket locations.
Installation Note. In this case, all bracket positions on the 1997 ES 300 will
require a 15 mm spacer.
INSTALLATION NOTE
COMMENT
a
Spacer – 15 mm for all anchors
b
Spacer – 10 mm for outer, 15 mm for center
c
Spacer – 15 mm for outer, 10 mm for center
d
Spacer – 5 mm for all anchors
N/A
Top strap anchor bracket mounting not available
Standard
No installation necessary, anchor already installed by factory
Page 3 of 4
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TOP STRAP BRACKET INSTALLATION – BO004-02
Installation
Reference
Information
(Continued)
OWNER’S
MANUAL
2000
1999
1998
1997
1996
1995
1994
1993
1992
1991
1990
OWNER’S
MANUAL
2000
1999
1998
1997
1996
1995
1994
1993
LS 400
ES 300
pg 117–118
Standard
pg 112–114
a
pg 111–113
a
pg 98–100
a
pg 79–82
a
pg 77–80
a
pg 74–75
b
pg 74–75
b
pg 62
b
pg 61–62
b
pg 61
b
pg 114–115
Standard
pg 105–106
a
pg 99–100
a
pg 89–90
a
pg 67–68
c
pg 67–68
c
pg 68–69
c
pg 60–61
c
pg 61–62
c
GS 400
GS 300
pg 112–113
Standard
pg 108–109
a
pg 107–108
a
pg 112–113
Standard
pg 108–109
a
pg 107–108
a
pg 97–98
a
pg 70–72
a
pg 69–70
a
pg 69–70
a
pg 69–70
a
ES 250
LX 470
SC 300
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
pg 91–92
a
pg 72–73
a
pg 70–71
a
pg 67–68
a
pg 67–68
a
pg 61–62
a
pg 91–92
a
pg 72–73
a
pg 70–71
a
pg 67–68
a
pg 67–68
a
pg 61–62
a
LX 450
RX 300
pg 126–127
d
pg 123–124
d*
N/A
N/A
N/A
1991
1990
Page 4 of 4
SC 400
pg 59–60
a
pg 55–56
a
1992
*
July 29, 2002
1999 RX 300 Owner’s Manual OM48403U refer to pages 126–127.
N/A
N/A
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
August 11, 2000
SEAT HEATER REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
Models:
’97 – ’99 & ’00 ES 300
TSB Revision Notice:
The information updated in this TSB is red and underlined.
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
’97–’99 ES 300
Parts
Information
This is to inform you of the seat heater replacement procedure. A change has been
made to allow separate installation of the seat heater element.
S 1997 – 1999, and 2000 model year ES 300 vehicles.
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY
87510–33090*1
87510–33090
87510–0W091*2
Heater Assembly
Assembly, Front Seat Cushion,
Cushion RH
1
Heater Assembly, Front Seat Cushion, LH
1
87510 33100 1
87510–33100*
87510–0W101*2
Heater Assembly, Front Seatback, RH
1
Heater Assembly, Front Seatback, LH
1
Pad, Front Seat Cushion Cover
2
71517–33010
*1 Made by Natsushita (3–pin type)
*2 Made by Scandmec (2–pin type)
’00 MY ES 300
Parts
Information
PART NUMBER
87510 33110
87510–33110
87510–33120
Warranty
Information
PART NAME
QTY
Heater Assembly, Front Seat Cushion, RH
1
Heater Assembly, Front Seat Cushion, LH
1
Heater Assembly, Front Seatback, RH
1
Heater Assembly, Front Seatback, LH
1
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
BD9009
Remove and Replace Seat Heater
2.0
87510–33##0
T1
T2
87 71
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 10
BODY
BO005–00
Title:
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
Required
Tools and
Material
S
S
S
S
August 11, 2000
Tacker
Tacks
Hog Ring Pliers
Adhesive Tape
NOTE:
Special Service Tools can be ordered through the Lexus SST program by calling
1–800–933–8335.
ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
TOOL NUMBER
TOOL NAME
SUPPLIER
QTY
00002–17750
Seat Heater Attachment Tool
OTC
1
00002–16500
Fasteners
OTC
10,000 pieces
7 mm
00002–01775
Seat Heater Attachment Kit
OTC
1 Set
00002–01780
Seat Heater Tool Replacement Needles
OTC
3
How to use the Tacker:
As shown below, drive in a tack pin with the tacker and fix the seat heater to the seat
cover.
Figure 1.
Tack Pin
Listing Pocket
Seat Heater
Seat Cover
Page 2 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
Repair
Information
August 11, 2000
S For the installation/removal of the seat and the disassembly/assembly of the seat
cushion assembly, refer to the 2000 model year ES 300 Repair Manual (pages
BO–97 through 105).
S Care should be taken during the operation to protect the seat cover from scratches,
dirt or accidental cuts.
’97 – ’99
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
1. Turn seat cover inside out.
2. Remove seat wire.
A. Remove the 2 seat wires that are
routed from the seat cushion
cover and seatback cover. (See
Figure 2.)
Figure 2.
3. Remove seat heater.
A. Seat cushion cover:
Cut the 7 tack pins that are
fastened to the seat heater, then
remove the seat heater.
SEATBACK COVER
B. Seatback cover:
Cut the 8 tack pins that are
fastened to the seat heater, then
remove the seat heater.
C. Using a cutter, cut the piece of felt
along the heater’s outline as
shown in Figure 3.
SEAT CUSHION COVER
Figure 3.
NOTE:
Do not cause any damage to the seat
cushion pad while cutting the felt.
4. Seat cushion cover:
Install new seat heater.
Refer to Figure 4 on the following
page.
A. Align the new seat heater by
placing the marked side (part
number) against the seat cushion
cover.
Page 3 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’97 – ’99
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
August 11, 2000
B. For part A, position the seat heater by aligning the end of the fin with the fold line
of the listing pocket.
C. For part B, position the seat heater by aligning the heater’s center line with the
cover’s V slit.
D. Using a tacker, attach the seat heater to the seat cushion cover.
NOTE:
S Do not substitute other metal parts in place of tack pins.
S Insufficient distance between the heater and cover may result in damage to the
heater.
HINT:
S Attach tack pins on the seam side so that the wire can be passed through the hole
from the fold side.
S Sewing thread can be substituted for tack pins. However, allow a distance of 6–7
mm (0.24–0.28 in.) between both sewn parts of the heater and cover.
Figure 4.
SEAT CUSHION COVER
x
x
B
x
x
x
A
A
x
x
x: Tack Pin
Listing Pocket
Seat Heater
Wire
Wire
Tack Pin
CORRECT
Tack Pin
Wire
INCORRECT
Page 4 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’97 – ’99
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
August 11, 2000
5. Seatback cover: Install new seat heater.
Refer to Figure 5 below.
A. Face the marked side (part number) to the seat cushion pad.
B. For part A, position the seat heater by aligning the end of the fin with the fold line
of the listing pocket.
C. For part B, position the seat heater by aligning the heater’s center line with the
cover’s center line.
D. Using a tacker, attach the seat heater to the seatback cover.
NOTE:
S Do not substitute other metal parts in place of tack pins.
S Insufficient distance between the heater and cover may result in damage to the
heater.
Figure 5.
SEATBACK COVER
x
x
A
A
x
B
x
x
x
x
x
x: Tack Pin
Listing Pocket
Seat Heater
Wire
Wire
Tack Pin
Tack Pin
CORRECT
Wire
INCORRECT
Page 5 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’97 – ’99
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
HINT:
S Attach tack pins on the seam side so
that the wire can be threaded
through the hole from the fold side.
S Sewing thread can be substituted
for tack pins. However, allow a
distance of 6–7 mm (0.24–0.28 in.)
between both sewn parts of the
heater and cover.
August 11, 2000
Figure 6.
SEAT CUSHION COVER
6. Install seat wire.
Install the 2 seat wires to the seat
cushion cover and seatback cover, as
shown in Figure 6.
HINT:
Pass the wire over the seat heater as
shown in Figure 7.
SEATBACK COVER
Figure 7.
Listing Pocket
Wire
7. Reverse seat cover back to its
original position.
Seat Heater
8. Seat cushion cover:
Install seat heater to seat cushion
pad.
Attach a piece of felt to the seat
heater and the pad as illustrated in
Figure 8.
Figure 8.
Felt
Seat Heater
Seat Cushion
Pad
15 – 25 mm
(0.59 – 0.98 in.)
9. Install seat cover.
Install the seat covers with new hog
rings to the seat cushion pad and the
seatback pad.
15 – 25 mm
(0.59 – 0.98 in.)
Page 6 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’00 MY
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
Refer to Figure 9 at right.
August 11, 2000
Figure 9.
SEAT CUSHION COVER
1. Turn seat cover inside out.
2. Remove seat wire.
Remove the seat wires that are
passed over the seat heater from the
seat cushion cover and the seatback
cover.
3. Remove seat heater.
A. Seat cushion cover:
Cut the 24 tack pins that are
fastened to the seat heater, then
remove the seat heater.
SEATBACK COVER
B. Seatback cover:
Cut the 8 tack pins that are
fastened to the seat heater, then
remove the seat heater.
4. Seat cushion cover:
Install new seat heater.
Install a new front seat heater as
shown in Figure 10 on the following
page.
A. Set the seat heater, marked side
(part number) to the seat cushion
pad.
B. For part A, attach the fin of the
heater to the cover and fasten
them at the margin with a tack
pin.
C. For part B, position the seat
heater by aligning the seat
heater’s center line with the seat
cushion cover’s V slit.
D. For part C, position the heater by
aligning the end of the fin with the
fold line of the listing pocket.
E. Align the V points of 4 and 6 with
the seat cover’s V cuts and fasten
them with tack pins.
F. Using a tacker, attach tack pins to
the side of the seat heater in
order from 1 to 12.
NOTE:
S Do not substitute other metal parts
for tack pins.
S Insufficient distance between the
heater and cover may result in
damage to the heater.
Page 7 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’00 MY
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
August 11, 2000
HINT:
S Attach tack pins on the seam side so that the wire can be threaded through the hole
from the fold side.
S Sewing thread can be substituted for tack pins. However, allow a distance of 6–7
mm (0.24–0.28 in.) between both sewn parts of the heater and cover.
Figure 10.
SEAT CUSHION COVER
B
B
x
x
4
4
x5
A
A
x 3
5
x
3
x
B
B
x 6
x 7
6 x
10 x
x 10
D
11 x
7 x
x 11
8 x
x 8
x
1
1
A
12 x
C
x
A
Part Number
Identification
C
x
12
x 9
9 x
x
2 A
A
2
x
x: Tack Pin
Listing Pocket
Seat Heater
Wire
Wire
Tack Pin
Tack Pin
CORRECT
Wire
INCORRECT
Page 8 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’00 MY
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
August 11, 2000
5. Seatback cover: Install new seat heater.
Install a new front seat heater as shown in Figure 11 below.
A. For part A, attach the fin of the seat heater to the cover and fasten them at the
margin with a tack pin.
B. For part B, position the seat heater by aligning the seat heater’s center line with
the seat cushion cover’s V slit.
C. Using a tacker, attach tack pins to the side of the seat heater in order from 1 to 4.
Figure 11.
SEATBACK COVER
1 x
x 1
A
A
B
x 2
2 x
x 3
3 x
Part Number
Identification
x 4
4 x
x: Tack Pin
Seat Heater
Listing Pocket
Wire
Wire
Tack Pin
CORRECT
Tack Pin
Wire
INCORRECT
Page 9 of 10
SEAT HEATER REPLACMENT PROCEDURE – BO005-00 Revised
’00 MY
ES 300
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
August 11, 2000
NOTE:
S Do not substitute other metal parts
for tack pins.
S Insufficient distance between the
heater and cover may result in
damage to the heater.
HINT:
S Attach tack pins on the seam side so
that the wire can be passed through
the hole from the fold side.
S Sewing thread can be substituted
for tack pins. However, allow a
distance of 6–7 mm (0.24–0.28 in.)
between both sewn parts of the
heater and cover.
6. Install seat wires.
Install the removed wires to the seat
cushion cover and the seatback
cover.
Figure 12.
Listing Pocket
Wire
HINT:
Pass the wire over the seat heater as
shown in Figure 12.
Seat Heater
7. Reverse seat cover back to its
original position.
Page 10 of 10
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
March 23, 2001
Introduction
All Applicable Models
MODEL
YEAR
LS 400
1990 – 2001
ES 250
1990 – 1991
ES 300
1992 – 2001
SC 400
1992 – 2001
SC 300
1992 – 2001
GS 400
1993 – 2001
GS 300
1993 – 2001
LX 450
1996 – 1998
LX 470
1998 – 2001
RX 300
2000 – 2001
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
N/A
73219–02010
Stopper, Tongue Plate (Black)*
N/A
73219–02020
Stopper, Tongue Plate (Gray)*
N/A
73219–02030
Stopper, Tongue Plate (Beige)*
*
Warranty
Information
Models:
A new service part for seat belt tongue plate stoppers has been introduced. Installation
procedures are provided to supplement the Repair Manual.
Applicable
Vehicles
Parts
Information
NEW SEAT BELT TONGUE PLATE
STOPPER SERVICE PARTS
Use a stopper color that is closest to the seat belt webbing color.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
BD0046
Install Seat Belt Tongue Plate Stopper
0.1
73219–020#0
T1
T2
62 12
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is
in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s
in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 3
BODY
BO005-01
Title:
NEW SEAT BELT TONGUE PLATE STOPPER SERVICE PARTS – BO005-01
Installation
Procedure
1. Preparation
A. Shift the Tongue Plate to the
upper portion of the Tongue Plate
Stopper, and temporarily hold it
with a clip or tape.
B. Remove any pieces of the original
Tongue Plate Stopper in the
webbing with a pair of pliers.
Tongue
Plate
March 23, 2001
Tape
Example of
Broken Tongue
Plate Stopper
CAUTION:
Damaged or weakened seat belts may
break in an accident and injure the
occupant. The seat belt assembly must
be replaced if:
S The webbing is cut, frayed, worn, or
damaged.
S It has been used in a severe impact.
Inspect the entire length of webbing
for damage and replace the assembly
if needed. Be careful not to damage
the webbing during repair.
2. Install the Tongue Plate Stopper
A. Install a new Tongue Plate
Stopper in the hole of the
webbing.
NOTE:
Be aware of the installation direction
of the Tongue Plate Stopper as shown
in the illustration.
Tongue Plate
Stopper
B. Pinch the Tongue Plate Stopper
into the webbing using an
adjustable wrench, and turn and
push the adjustment screw by
hand.
HINT:
Press the adjustment screw in order to
position the male and female parts of
the Tongue Plate Stopper parallel to
each other, as shown in illustration.
CAUTION:
DO NOT use pliers. They may damage
the webbing.
Page 2 of 3
Webbing
NEW SEAT BELT TONGUE PLATE STOPPER SERVICE PARTS – BO005-01
Installation
Procedure
(Continued)
March 23, 2001
C. When the adjustment screw for
the adjustable wrench can’t be
turned by hand, tighten the
adjustment screw using a pair of
adjustable joint pliers until the
space between jaws of the
adjustable wrench is 4.5 – 5.0 mm.
(See illustrations.)
4.5 – 5.0 mm
D. Check to be sure that the male
pin of the Tongue Plate Stopper
has become deformed evenly in
the hole of the female part and is
firmly held to the belt webbing.
(See illustrations.)
CORRECT
INCORRECT
Page 3 of 3
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
TRIM GARNISH LOOSE
Models:
All Models
September 12, 2003
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
Customers may experience an interior trim panel either loose or fitting poorly due to a
deformed or missing clip. When a trim garnish (A, B, C or D pillar garnishes, door trim
panel, etc.) is removed and reinstalled using the old clips, it may cause the garnish to
exhibit a loose condition. To prevent this condition from occurring, ensure that new clips
are utilized for all attachment points every time a garnish is reinstalled. When installing
new parts, use either the new clips supplied with the part, or order new clips. Refer to the
parts catalog for specific part numbers.
S All models.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
BODY
BO007-03
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
August 10, 2001
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET
Models:
All Applicable ES 300, IS 300, LX 450, LX 470
& RX 300
To assist customers in preventing particle buildup and preserve the appearance of the
shoulder belt anchor, the following procedure has been developed.
S 1997 – 2001 model year ES 300 vehicles.
S
2000 – 2001 model year IS 300 vehicles.
S 1996 – 1997 model year LX 450 vehicles.
S 1998 – 2001 model year LX 470 vehicles.
S 1999 – 2001 model year RX 300 vehicles.
Parts
Information
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
73205–48011
Tape Set, Shoulder Belt Anchor
NOTE:
The above tape set contains the fluorocarbon resin tape (2 pieces) and Velcro tape (1 piece).
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
BD1011
DESCRIPTION
Clean the Shoulder Belt Anchor
TIME
OPN
0.3
73210–#####–##*1
73220–#####–##*1
T1
T2
61 99
*1 OPN should be part number of whichever belt assembly that the procedure is performed on.
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in
effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s
in-service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 4
BODY
BO009-01
Title:
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET – BO009-01
Installation
Procedure
1. CLEAN SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR
NOTE:
S Do not install the tape when the
vehicle temperature is below the
freezing point.
S Do not re–use removed fluorocarbon
resin tape.
A. Pull out the seat belt about
300 mm and attach a clip as
shown in the illustration.
HINT:
Preventing the seat belt from retraction
with a clip will make the following
work easier.
B. Put the Velcro tape (in the parts
kit) through the hole of the
shoulder belt anchor,
brush–shaped side to the anchor.
C. Pull both ends of the Velcro tape
with your hand and shave off the
dirt on the shoulder belt anchor by
moving the Velcro tape several
times as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Remove the dirt completely. Otherwise,
the fluorocarbon resin tape may not
adhere properly.
Page 2 of 4
August 10, 2001
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET – BO009-01
Installation
Procedure
(Continued)
August 10, 2001
2. INSTALL FLUOROCARBON RESIN
TAPE
A. Place the fluorocarbon resin tape
onto the seat belt as shown in the
illustration.
NOTE:
Before installation of the fluorocarbon
resin tape, it is necessary to pre–release
the colored film about 5 mm for each
side. (Not fully released.)
B. By pulling up the seat belt, put the
fluorocarbon resin tape through
the hole of the shoulder belt
anchor. Match the shoulder belt
anchor to the center of the tape.
C. Remove the upper side colored
film from the fluorocarbon resin
tape, and securely affix the tape
to the outside of the shoulder belt
anchor.
D. Remove the lower side colored
film from the fluorocarbon resin
tape, and securely affix the tape
to the outside of the shoulder belt
anchor.
NOTE:
S Be sure to affix the fluorocarbon
tape securely along all edges.
S Pay attention not to make any
wrinkles or slack in the fluorocarbon
resin tape.
E. Remove the clip.
Page 3 of 4
SHOULDER BELT ANCHOR TAPE SET – BO009-01
Installation
Procedure
(Continued)
F. By pulling the seat belt up and
down several times, as shown in
the illustration, securely affix the
fluorocarbon resin tape and
confirm the smoothness of the
belt movement.
NOTE:
Affix the fluorocarbon resin tape on
the shoulder belt anchor to the other
side following the same procedure.
NOTE:
If the seat belt requires cleaning to
remove dirt, only use a neutral
detergent or lukewarm water to clean.
Use the seat belt after it is completely
dried, to confirm proper operation.
Page 4 of 4
August 10, 2001
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
November 10, 2005
SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT FOR SIDE
AIRBAG EQUIPPED VEHICLES
Models:
’97 – ’06 All Lexus Models
TSIB UPDATE NOTICE:
The information contained in this TSIB supercedes TSIB No. BO004-98.
TSIB No. BO004-98 is now obsolete and should be discarded.
Introduction
Beginning in 1997, Lexus introduced side airbags for the LS 400. Starting with 1998,
all Lexus vehicles are equipped with side airbags as standard equipment.
Lexus does NOT recommend replacement of original seat covers* with non-Lexus leather
or other seat cover materials due to the following:
S Seat covers NOT recommended by Lexus may affect side airbag performance, in
general or in part, during an accident.
S Modifications that negatively affect side airbag performance can result in severe
occupant injuries.
S Seat covers are an integral part of this safety system. Replacing original seat covers*
with non-Lexus leather or other seat cover materials may compromise the
effectiveness of this safety system.
S The design of the seat is complex, integrating safety and strength with comfort
and luxury.
*NOTE:
Lexus original seat covers that were NOT designed for side airbag equipped seats
cannot be used due to the effect on proper airbag performance.
Lexus strongly discourages modifying original equipment seats that have
side airbags.
Additionally, Lexus strongly advises against the installation or use of aftermarket
seat covers, which could impair the performance of the side airbags in the event of
an accident.
Applicable
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
S All 1997 – 2006 model year Lexus vehicles.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
BODY
BO012-05
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
January 2, 1998
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
Correction
Information
ABS & TRAC ACTUATOR RESISTANCE
VALUE CORRECTIONS
Models:
’97 & ’98 ES 300
Corrections have been made to the resistance value inside of the ABS & TRAC actuator
on the pages of the following Repair Manuals
PUBLICATION NUMBER
PUBLICATION NAME
AFFECTED PAGES
RM511U
’97 ES 300 Repair Manual
DI–280, DI–283
RM577U
’98 ES 300 Repair Manual
DI–316, DI–319
S 1997 & 1998 ES 300s.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not applicable to warranty
–
–
–
–
’97 ES 300 Repair Manual RM511U,
Page DI–280
DI–280
Under INSPECTION PROCEDURE, Item
#2 (Diagnostics – ABS & Traction Control
System) the resistance value has been
corrected to 33 Ohms when measuring
between terminals A7–4 and A7–5 of the
ABS and TRAC Actuator.
The previous resistance value was 4 – 6
Ohms.
’97 ES 300 Repair Manual RM511U,
Page DI–283
DI–283
Under INSPECTION PROCEDURE, Item
#2 (Diagnostics – ABS & Traction Control
System) the resistance value has been
corrected to 33 Ohms when measuring
between terminals A7–2 and A7–3 of the
ABS and TRAC Actuator.
The previous resistance value was 4 – 6
Ohms.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
BRAKES
BR001–98
Title:
ABS & TRAC ACTUATOR RESISTANCE VALUE CORRECTIONS – BR001–98
Correction
Information
(Continued)
’98 ES 300 Repair Manual RM577U,
Page DI–316
DI–316
Under INSPECTION PROCEDURE, Item
#2 (Diagnostics – ABS & Traction Control
System) the resistance value has been
corrected to 33 Ohms when measuring
between terminals A7–4 and A7–5 of the
ABS and TRAC Actuator.
The previous resistance value was 4 – 6
Ohms.
’98 ES 300 Repair Manual RM577U,
Page DI–319
Under INSPECTION PROCEDURE, Item
#2 (Diagnostics – ABS & Traction Control
System) the resistance value has been
corrected to 33 Ohms when measuring
between terminals A7–2 and A7–3 of the
ABS and TRAC Actuator.
The previous resistance value was 4 – 6
Ohms.
Page 2 of 2
DI–319
January 2, 1998
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
FRONT BRAKE NOISE
Models:
’97–’99 ES 300
March 26, 1999
Introduction
New Front Brake Pads are available to reduce front brake groan or grinding noise on
1997–1999 ES 300.
S 1997 to 1999 ES 300s built before VIN:
Tsutsumi:
JT8BF28G * * –0179640
TMK:
JT8BF28G * * –5064736
Parts
Information
*
Repair
Procedure
PART NUMBER
PART NAME
04465–33121
Front Brake Pads
04945–33040
Shim Kit (If Needed*)
Visually inspect Shims for heat discoloration. If discolored, then replace.
1. Surface the disc rotors with the “On–Car Brake Lathe” to within serviceable limits.
2. If the rotors are unserviceable or below minimum thickness, replace the rotors.
3. Check any new disc rotors for runout.
4. If the disc rotor runout is over 0.03 mm (0.0012 in), perform phase matching
procedure.
5. Replace the front brake pads.
6. Road test.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
473025
COMB
A
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
Grind Front Discs and Replace Pads, Shims
(if needed) for Squeak (both sides)
36 99
Grind Front Discs and Replace Pads, Shims
(if needed) for Vibration (both sides)
2.1 04465–33121 21 99
Grind Front Discs and Replace Pads, Shims
(if needed) for Groan/Grinding (both sides)
91 99
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
BRAKES
BR001–99
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
BRAKE PAD CLICKING NOISE
Models:
’90 – ’00 All Models
October 20, 2000
Introduction
A clicking type noise may be noticed when first applying the brakes after changing
vehicle travel direction (Drive/Forward to Reverse, Reverse to Drive/Forward). This is
a normal noise caused by the required brake pad–to–caliper clearances. When the
direction of travel is changed, the brake pads may “shift” towards the new direction of
travel. When the brake pad contacts the caliper, a clicking noise may be heard.
To minimize this clicking noise, a disc brake caliper grease has been made available for
use during brake service/maintenance operations. Under normal usage conditions this
grease should be effective for a period of 6 months to 1 year.
Applicable
Vehicles
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
S 1990 – 2000 model year Lexus vehicles, all models.
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
N/A
08887–80609
Disc Brake Caliper Grease (50 g tube)
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 4
BRAKES
BR003–00
Title:
BRAKE PAD CLICKING NOISE – BR003–00
Application
Procedure
October 20, 2000
There are two types of brake calipers: floating and fixed. Check the type of brake caliper
installed on the vehicle by removing the wheel assembly.
1. Floating Type Brake Caliper
A. Lift up or remove the brake caliper
and suspend it securely.
HINT:
Do not disconnect the flexible hose
from the brake caliper.
B. If equipped with anti–squeal
spring: Remove the anti–squeal
springs.
C. Remove the brake pads with
anti–squeal shims.
D. Remove the pad support plates
from the torque plate. Clean any
dust from the pad support plates,
torque plates and brake pads.
E. Apply a small amount of the
disc brake caliper grease
(1–2 mm thick) to both sides
of the pad support plates.
Torque
Plate
Pad Support
Plates
Pad Support Plates
NOTE:
Do NOT apply grease to the friction
surfaces of the brake pads or the
disc rotor.
F. If the pad support plate is fixed to
the torque plate with adhesive tape,
perform the operation according to
the following flow chart.
Apply Disc Brake Caliper Grease
Check whether or not the pad support plate
and the torque plate are fixed firmly in place
with adhesive tape.
Fixed firmly in place
Without removing the pad
support plate, apply a small
amount of grease to the portion
where the pad touches the
surface of the support plate.
Page 2 of 4
There is adhesive tape, but
it is not fixed firmly in place
Adhesive tape is peeled off
Remove the pad support plate,
peel off the adhesive tape and
apply a small amount of grease to
both sides of the support plate.
Remove the pad support plate
and apply a small amount of
grease to both sides of the
support plate.
BRAKE PAD CLICKING NOISE – BR003–00
Application
Procedure
(Continued)
G. Apply a small amount of the
disc brake caliper grease
(1–2 mm thick) to the caliper
as indicated in the illustration.
H. Install the brake pads with the
anti–squeal shims.
I. If equipped with anti–squeal
spring: Install the anti–squeal
springs.
J. Press the piston in firmly and
install the brake caliper.
October 20, 2000
Apply Disc Brake
Caliper Grease
NOTE:
S Clean excess grease from brake
pad and caliper.
S Do NOT apply grease to the friction
surfaces of the brake pads or the
disc rotor.
K. Install the wheel assembly.
2. Fixed Type Brake Caliper
There are two types of brake pads:
S Type “A”: Has a projection on the
upper and lower side of the brake
pad. (See illustration.)
Type “A”
Brake Pad
Type “B”
Brake Pad
Flat Edge
Projection
S Type “B”: Has a flat upper and
lower edge on the brake pad
backing plate.
Type “A” Brake Pad
A. Remove the anti–squeal spring,
clip and pad guide pin.
B. Remove the brake pads with the
anti–squeal shims.
C. Clean any dust from the brake
pads.
Type “A” Brake Pad
Page 3 of 4
BRAKE PAD CLICKING NOISE – BR003–00
Application
Procedure
(Continued)
October 20, 2000
D. Apply a small amount of the
disc brake caliper grease
(1–2 mm thick) to the areas
indicated in the illustration.
NOTE:
Do NOT apply grease to the friction
surfaces of the brake pads or the
disc rotor.
E. Install the brake pads with the
anti–squeal shims.
Apply Disc Brake
Caliper Grease
NOTE:
Clean excess grease from the brake
pads and caliper.
F. Install the pad guide pin, clip and
anti–squeal spring.
G. Install the wheel assembly.
Type “B” Brake Pad
A. Remove the clip, pins and
anti–rattle spring/pad retainer clip.
B. Remove the brake pads with the
anti–squeal shims.
C. Clean any dust from the brake
pads.
Type “B” Brake Pad
D. Apply a small amount of the
disc brake caliper grease
(1–2 mm thick) to the areas
indicated in the illustration.
NOTE:
Do NOT apply grease to the friction
surfaces of the brake pads or the
disc rotor.
E. Install the brake pads with the
anti–squeal shims.
NOTE:
Clean excess grease from the brake
pads and caliper.
F. Install the pad guide pin, clip and
anti–squeal spring.
G. Install the wheel assembly.
Page 4 of 4
Apply Disc Brake
Caliper Grease
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
SULFUR ODOR FROM EXHAUST
Models:
All Models
February 24, 2003
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
Repair
Procedure
Some owners of Lexus vehicles may experience a sulfur–like or “rotten egg” odor from
the exhaust system. Sulfur is a natural component of crude oil from which gasoline is
refined and the amount of sulfur can be decreased through the refining process. The
amount of sulfur in fuel sold in California is regulated, however gasoline sold in other
states can have substantially higher sulfur content. Sulfur content also varies
considerably between gasoline brands and locations.
S All Models.
A sulfur odor emitted from the vehicle’s tailpipe does not necessarily indicate that there is
an issue with the engine’s running condition, but is most likely directly related to the fuel.
If the vehicle is exhibiting an excessive sulfur odor, the following checks should be
performed:
S If the MIL light is ON, check for DTCs and repair as necessary.
If no trouble is found after performing the above check, recommend the customer try a
different source of fuel.
Replacement of oxygen sensors, air/fuel ratio sensors or catalytic converters will not
reduce the odor and will therefore not be considered warrantable.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ENGINE
EG001-03
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
April 3, 1998
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
EVAP SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS: P0441 /
P0446
Models:
ES 300, SC 400, LS 400, LX 450
The following procedure is recommended for repair of MIL “ON” conditions involving
confirmed DTC P0441 and P0446.
S All ES 300, SC 400, LS 400, LX 450 that display a code P0441 or P0446.
A. Diagnostics for P0441:
1. Remove Vacuum Hoses between
EVAP VSV and Charcoal
Canister and discard.
2. If there is a metal vapor pipe
between EVAP VSV and
Charcoal Canister, clean inside of
vapor pipe.
3. Replace EVAP VSV and
Charcoal Canister assembly with
new parts.
4. Install new vacuum hoses
between EVAP VSV and
Charcoal Canister.
B. Diagnostics for P0446:
1. Inspect vacuum hoses and pipes
between EVAP (Purge) VSV and
Charcoal Canister for leaks.
2. Replace Vapor Pressure VSV and
Canister.
Affected Area
(shaded line)
ECM
Vapor Pressure
Sensor
VSV for
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
VSV for
EVAP
Charcoal Canister
Fuel Tank
Charcoal Canister Assembly (broken line)
NOTE:
When performing diagnostics for an occurrence of a MIL ”ON” condition, the Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) P0441 may be the result of debris in the Evaporative Emission
Control System. This may cause blockage of a vapor line, or a stuck VSV, as described
in the troubleshooting area of the Repair Manual.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ENGINE
EG001–98
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
April 27, 2001
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
Contents
Warranty
Information
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION
INFORMATION
Models:
All ’96 – ’01 Models
This service bulletin provides supplemental information regarding the system design,
operation, and diagnostics of the Early Type (Non–Intrusive) and Late Type (Intrusive)
EVAP Systems found on 1996 model year and later OBD II equipped vehicles.
MODEL
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
ES 300
Early
Early
Early
Early
Late
Late
GS 300
N/A
N/A
Early
Early
Early
Late
GS 400
N/A
N/A
Early
Early
Early
N/A
GS 430
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Late
IS 300
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Late
LS 400
N/A
N/A
Early
Early
Late
N/A
LS 430
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Late
LX 470
N/A
N/A
Early
Early
Early
Early
RX 300
N/A
N/A
N/A
Early
Late
Late
SC 300
N/A
N/A
Early
Early
Late
N/A
SC 400
N/A
Early
Early
Early
Late
N/A
This bulletin is divided into the following sections:
Early Type and Late Type EVAP System Outline
1. Early Type Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Late Type Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Late Type System Monitor Sequence . . . . . .
Diagnostic Tips For Late Type EVAP System . . . . . . . . . .
Pages 2–4
Pages 4–5
Pages 6–8
Pages 8–11
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Toyota Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 11
ENGINE
EG002-01
Title:
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Early Type
System
Description
April 27, 2001
Early Type (Non–Intrusive) EVAP System Overview
There are a variety of EVAP systems in use with different monitoring strategies. It is
essential that the EVAP system be correctly identified before beginning diagnosis. The
Repair Manual is the best source for this information. The following information covers
the different systems.
The first system described is the Early Type (Non–Intrusive) EVAP System. Refer to the
Applicable Vehicles chart for applicability information.
Onboard Recovery Valve
(Fill Check Valve)
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Three Way
VSV
Vacuum
Check
Valve
Tank Valve
Assembly
Pressure
Valve
Canister
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
Valve
Filtered
Air
Air Inlet Line
Service Air Drain Valve
Port
Air Valve Assembly
Purge Operation
When the engine has reached
predetermined parameters (closed loop,
engine temp. above 125rF, etc.), stored
fuel vapors are purged from the canister
whenever the purge VSV is opened by
the ECM. At the appropriate time, the
ECM will turn on the purge VSV.
Purge VSV
Fresh Air Inlet
The ECM will change the duty ratio cycle
of the purge VSV thus controlling purge
flow volume. Purge flow volume is
determined by manifold pressure and the
duty ratio cycle of the purge VSV.
Atmospheric pressure is allowed into the
canister to ensure that purge flow is
constantly maintained whenever purge
vacuum is applied to the canister (see
Figure 1).
Page 2 of 11
Figure 1. Purge Operation
Air Inlet Valve
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Early Type
System
Description
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
ORVR Operation
During refueling, low pressure above the
diaphragm in the onboard recovery valve
lifts allowing fuel vapors into the charcoal
canister. At the same time, the air drain
valve opens and the charcoal absorbs the
fuel vapors (see Figure 2).
Figure 2. ORVR Operation
Early Type (Non–Intrusive) EVAP System DTCs
EVAP Monitor Leak Operation P0440
The ECM tests for leaks by measuring
EVAP system pressure in the lines,
charcoal canister, and fuel tank. When
the EVAP pressure is higher or lower than
atmospheric pressure, the ECM
concludes that no leaks are present.
EVAP pressure is measured by the vapor
pressure sensor. If either the tank or
canister purge side is at atmospheric
pressure under specific conditions, the
ECM determines there is a leak.
Figure 3. Fuel Tank Side of System
If DTC P0440 is present, the leak is on
the fuel tank side of the EVAP system.
This also includes the lines between the
fuel tank and part of the canister. When
the Vapor Pressure sensor is measuring
tank pressure, the ECM is observing
changes in pressure and comparing tank
pressure to atmospheric pressure. No
difference in pressure indicates a leak.
The ECM may take 20 minutes or more to
complete testing the fuel tank side (see
Figure 3).
Canister Leak Detection P0446
When the ECM switches the vapor
pressure VSV to canister side, the ECM
measures canister pressure. A leak on
the canister side can set multiple DTCs
(see Figure 4).
Figure 4. Canister Side of System
Page 3 of 11
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Early Type
System
Description
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Vapor Purge Flow P0441
The EVAP monitor is designed to detect:
S Restricted vapor purge flow when the
purge VSV is open
S Inappropriate vapor purge flow when
the purge VSV is closed
Under normal purge conditions, pressure
pulsations generated by the cycling of the
purge VSV are present in the canister
and detected by the Vapor Pressure
sensor.
Figure 5. Flow During Purge Operation
Three–Way VSV P0446
The three–way VSV is connected to the Vapor Pressure sensor, canister, and fuel tank.
This VSV allows the Vapor Pressure sensor to detect either canister or tank pressure.
There are two modes the ECM can use to determine if the three–way VSV is
malfunctioning. The three–way VSV is judged to be normal if there is pressure difference
between the tank and canister when the three–way VSV is switched to look at the
charcoal canister and fuel tank side of system.
If there isn’t any pressure difference between the fuel tank and canister, the ECM looks
for the following conditions:
S During purging, pressure pulsations generated by the purge VSV are not present in
the canister as detected by Vapor Pressure sensor, the three–way VSV is judged to
be defective.
S If there are pressure pulsations detected by the Vapor Pressure sensor present in the
fuel tank, the three–way VSV is judged to be defective.
Late Type
System
Description
Late Type (Intrusive) EVAP System Overview
The Late Type EVAP System, also known as the Intrusive type, was developed to meet
the very stringent, mandated standard of detecting a hole 0.020 inch (0.5 mm). This
system uses many of the same components as the early type EVAP system. Purge,
vacuum relief, pressure relief, and ORVR operations are identical to the early type. Refer
to the Applicable Vehicles chart for applicability information.
The following changes were made to the Late Type EVAP System:
S Vapor pressure sensor connected to the fuel tank.
S Bypass VSV in the place of the three way VSV.
S Canister Closed Valve (CCV) on the air inlet line.
Page 4 of 11
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Late Type
System
Description
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Late Type (Intrusive EVAP System)
Onboard Recovery Valve
(Fill Check Valve)
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Vacuum
Check
Valve
Tank Valve
Assembly
Tank
Pressure
Valve
Canister
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
VSV
Filtered
Air
Canister
Closed Valve
Service
Port
Bypass
VSV
Air
Inlet Line
Air Drain
Valve
Air Inlet Valve
Air Valve Assembly
Tank Side
The bypass VSV and the fill check valve
assembly isolates the tank pressure side
from the canister side (see Figure 1).
Figure 1. Fuel Tank Side of System
Canister Side
The bypass VSV and the Fill Check valve
also isolate the canister side from the
tank side (see Figure 2).
Figure 2. Canister Side of System
Page 5 of 11
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Late Type
System
Monitor
Sequence
April 27, 2001
Late Type (Intrusive) EVAP System Monitor Sequence
The monitoring sequence for leak detection is different from that of the Early Type EVAP
System. The Late Type applies a very small vacuum to the EVAP system. The ECM then
determines if there is a problem in the system based on the vapor pressure sensor
signal.
Monitor Sequence
Open
CCV Open
Closed
Open
Bypass Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Purge Closed
Purge Closed
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Signal
Time in Minutes
Cold Start ECT/IAT
Near Same Temp
Negative
Pressure
(Vacuum)
Occurs
P0441
Leak Testing CCV Bypass
VSV Op
Period Occurs Op
P0440
P0442
Monitor Operation
The monitor sequence begins with a cold
engine start. The IAT and ECT sensors
must have approximately the same
temperature reading.
The ECM is constantly monitoring fuel
tank pressure. As the temperature of the
fuel increases, pressure slowly rises.
The ECM will purge the charcoal canister
at the appropriate time (see Figure 1).
With bypass VSV closed, pressure will
continue to rise in fuel tank.
Page 6 of 11
Figure 1. Canister Purge
P0446
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Late Type
System
Monitor
Sequence
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Purge VSV Operation – P0441
At a predetermined point, the ECM closes
the CCV and opens the Bypass VSV
causing vacuum to increase in the entire
EVAP system.
The ECM continues to operate the purge
VSV until the vacuum is increased to a
specified point at which time the ECM
closes the purge VSV (see Figure 2).
Figure 2. Vacuum Application
If the vacuum did not increase, or if the
vacuum increased beyond the specified
limit, the ECM judges the purge VSV and
related components to be faulty.
Hole Detection P0440 and P0442
The rate of pressure increase as detected
by the vapor pressure signal indicates the
if there is a leak and if it is a large or
small leak.
After purge valve operation, the purge
VSV is turned off sealing the vacuum in
the system and the ECM begins to
monitor the pressure increase (see
Figure 3). Some increase is normal. A
very rapid, sharp increase in pressure
indicates a leak in the EVAP system and
sets the DTC P0440.
Figure 3. System Sealed
This monitoring method is also able to
distinguish what is called the small leak
detection. A pressure rise just above
normal indicates a very small hole and
will set the DTC P0442.
Vent Control, CCV Operation P0446
This stage checks the CCV and vent (air
inlet side) operation. When the vapor
pressure rises to a specified point, the
ECM opens the CCV. Pressure will
increase rapidly because of the air
allowed into the system. No increase or
an increase below specified rate of
pressure increase indicates a restriction
on the air inlet side.
Figure 4. CCV Opens
Page 7 of 11
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Late Type
System
Monitor
Sequence
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Bypass VSV Operation P0446
In the next stage, the ECM closes the
bypass VSV. This action blocks air
entering the fuel tank side of the system.
The pressure rise on the fuel tank side is
no longer as great. If there was no
change in pressure, the ECM will
conclude the bypass VSV did not close.
Figure 5. Bypass VSV Closes
Diagnostic
Tips for Late
Type EVAP
System
This diagnostic process tests the EVAP System. The following diagnostic tips may be
used in conjunction with the Diagnostic Procedures for EVAP DTCs listed in the Repair
Manual. They may be used for all Late Type (Intrusive) EVAP Systems and for all EVAP
DTCs. Refer to the Applicable Vehicles chart for applicability information.
The EVAP System Pressure Test Kit (P/N 00002–6872A) and the Scan Tool can be used
to diagnose the EVAP System. Measuring EVAP System pressures using the EVAP
System Pressure Tester Gauge and the Scan Tool can aid in the identification of leaks in
the system.
System Outline
Onboard Recovery Valve
(Fill Check Valve)
Vapor
Pressure
Sensor
Tank Pressure Valve
Vacuum
Check
Valve
Tank Valve
Assembly
Canister
To
Manifold
Vacuum
Purge
Valve
Filtered
Air
Canister
Closed
Valve
Page 8 of 11
Bypass
Valve
Air Drain
Valve
Air Valve
Assembly
Air Inlet
Valve
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Diagnostic
Tips for Late
Type EVAP
System
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Diagnostic Process Flow Chart
START
PRELIMINARY CHECK
S Fuel level should be between
1/4 and 3/4
S Visually inspect for pressure
Fuel Cap
DO NOT TIGHTEN OR REMOVE!
NG
DO NOT PROCEED!
OK
SCAN TOOL SETUP
A) Connect Scan Tool to DLC3 on vehicle.
B) Go to the SETUP menu and select UNIT CONVERSION.
C) Under VAPOR PRESSURE, Select ABS for absolute pressure, and mmHg for millimeters of mercury.
This is to match the Repair Manual specifications.
D) Go back to FUNCTION SELECT menu and select ENHANCED OBD II.
E) Select NORMAL MODE. Then select CURRENT DATA and USER SELECT.
F) Using the arrow key, select VAPOR PRESS from the DATA LIST and select YES.
G) Press ENTER. You will now be able to monitor the Vapor Pressure Sensor reading.
PRESSURIZE EVAP SYSTEM (System Integrity Check)
This test checks for leaks in the canister and fuel tank sides. The CCV and Air Inlet Lines will be checked
separately.
A) Clamp air drain line with supplied hose pliers.
B) Locate the vapor pressure sensor. If the pressure sensor has two hoses connected to it, disconnect
the hose between the air drain and pressure sensor at the pressure sensor and plug the hose.
C) Pressurize EVAP system. Turn off the pump and seal system (See pump directions)
D) Note pump pressure readings and Vapor Pressure Sensor reading.
E) Compare the results to one of the four conditions listed below and proceed as directed.
Pump pressure
gauge and vapor
pressure above
atmospheric
pressure (above 762
mmHg). No leak in
canister or tank.
Pump pressure
gauge zero, vapor
pressure above
atmospheric
pressure (above 762
mmHg). Leak is on
canister side of
system.
Pump pressure
gauge is above
atmospheric
pressure (above
zero), vapor
pressure is at
762 mmHg. Leak is
on the fuel tank side
of system.
Pump pressure
gauge at zero,
vapor pressure is
at 762 mmHg. The
leak(s) is/are on the
canister and tank
sides or a leak at a
point common to
both sides of system.
Remove hose pliers
from the air drain
hose on the charcoal
canister before
proceeding with
additional checks.
Remove hose pliers
from the air drain
hose on the charcoal
canister before
proceeding with
additional checks.
Remove hose pliers
from the air drain
hose on the charcoal
canister before
proceeding with
additional checks.
Remove hose pliers
from the air drain
hose on the charcoal
canister before
proceeding with
additional checks.
Go to CCV/Air Inlet
Line Check.
Go to “Canister Leak
Check.” Diagram on
page 11.
Go to “Fuel Tank
Leak Check.”
Diagram on page 10.
Go to “Fuel Tank
Leak Check.”
Diagram on page 10.
(Continued on following page)
Page 9 of 11
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Diagnostic
Tips for Late
Type EVAP
System
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Diagnostic Process Flow Chart (Continued)
(Continued from previous page)
CCV and Air Inlet Line Check.
A) Disconnect the air inlet line from the charcoal canister.
B) Using the supplied step–down brass adapter (or equivalent) connect the Pressure Supply Hose to
the air inlet line.
C) Using the Scan Tool Active Test, turn on the CCV. This will close the CCV.
D) Pressurize the line. Once pressurized, turn off the pump and seal the line (Pressure Hold Switch to
“Closed” and Vent Switch to “Closed”). Pressure should hold. If not, check CCV and connections.
E) Next, using the Scan Tool, turn off the CCV. This will open the CCV. The pressure should decrease.
If not, check the CCV and connections.
F) After completing the test, reconnect air inlet line to charcoal canister.
Go to “Return Vehicle to Service” on page 11.
Fuel Tank Leak Check
Disconnect
EVAP Hose Here
A. Using the supplied brass step–down adapter, disconnect the EVAP hose from
the charcoal canister side as indicated above. Connect Pressure Supply hose
from Pressure Test Kit to the EVAP hose and pressurize the fuel tank to
30 mmHg (4 kPa / 0.58 psi).
B. Check that the internal pressure of the tank will hold for 1 minute. Check shaded
areas for leaks (soapy water can be used for leak detection). If pressure holds, then
perform the Canister Leak Check.
C. When done, reconnect the EVAP line hose to the charcoal canister.
Page 10 of 11
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION INFORMATION – EG002-01
Diagnostic
Tips for Late
Type EVAP
System
(Continued)
April 27, 2001
Canister Leak Check
A. Connect the Pressure Supply hose from the Pressure Test Kit to the Green EVAP
System Service Port located on the EVAP Purge VSV line in the engine compartment.
B. Using the directions on the inside of the EVAP System Pressure Test Kit lid,
pressurize the EVAP system. Once pressurized, turn off the pump and seal the system
(Pressure Hold Switch to “Closed” and Vent Switch to “Closed”)
C. With system pressurized at EVAP Service Port, check shaded areas for leaks
(soapy water can be used for leak detection).
Return Vehicle to Service
A. After performing above checks, be sure to reconnect all lines and verify that all
plugs and hose pliers used for diagnosis have been removed.
B. For additional diagnostic procedures and information, refer to the appropriate
Repair Manual.
Page 11 of 11
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS
Models:
All ’96 – ’02
February 8, 2002
Introduction
The On–Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system is designed to monitor the performance of
emission–related components and report any detected abnormalities in the form of
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Since the various components need to be monitored
during different driving conditions, the OBDII system is designed to run separate
monitoring programs called Readiness Monitors. Many state Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs require that vehicles complete their Readiness Monitors
prior to beginning an emissions test.
The current status of the Readiness Monitors can be seen by using the Lexus Diagnostic
Tester with version 9.0 software (or newer), or a generic OBDII Scantool. To view the
Readiness Monitor status using the Lexus Diagnostic Tester, select “Monitor Status”
from the Enhanced OBDII Menu. A status of “complete” indicates that the necessary
conditions have been met to run the performance tests for the related Readiness Monitor.
The Readiness Monitor will be reset to “incomplete” if:
r ECU has lost power (battery or fuse).
r DTCs have been cleared.
r The conditions for running the Readiness Monitor have not been met.
In the event that any Readiness Monitor shows “incomplete,” follow the appropriate
Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern to change the readiness status to “complete.”
Refer to the Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern Application Table to determine which
drive pattern should be followed.
Contents
SECTION
PAGE(S)
Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern Application Tables
2–3
Readiness Monitor Drive Patterns
Applicable
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
1
EGR Monitor (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine)
4
2
EGR Monitor (For 1FZ–FE Engine)
5
3
Catalyst Monitor (O2S Type)
6
4
Catalyst Monitor (AF Sensor Type)
7
5
EVAP Monitor (Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type)
6
EVAP Monitor (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type)
7
EVAP Monitor (Without Leak Detection)
12
8
Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front and Rear O2S System)
13
9
Oxygen/AF Sensor Monitor (Front AF Sensor and Rear O2S System)
14
10
Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor
15
8–9
10–11
r All 1996 – 2002 model year Lexus vehicles.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 15
ENGINE
EG002-02
Title:
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Terms &
Definitions
February 8, 2002
J1930 TERM
J1930 DEFINITION
TOYOTA/LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TESTER PARAMETER
IAT
Intake Air Temperature
Intake Air
ECT
Engine Coolant Temperature
Coolant Temp
Required
Tools &
Material
TOOLS & MATERIAL
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
Lexus Diagnostic Tester Kit
01001270
1
12 Megabyte Diagnostic Tester Program Card
with version 9.0a Software (or later)
01002593-005
1
NOTE:
A generic OBDII Scantool can be used in place of the Toyota Diagnostic Tester.
CAUTION:
Strict observance of posted speed limits, traffic laws and road conditions are
required when performing these drive patterns.
NOTE:
r These drive patterns represent the fastest method to satisfy all necessary
conditions which allow the specific readiness monitor to complete.
r In the event that the drive pattern must be interrupted (possibly due to traffic
conditions or other factors) the drive pattern can be resumed and, in most cases,
the readiness monitor will still set to “complete.”
r To ensure rapid completion of readiness monitors, avoid sudden changes in vehicle
load and speed (driving up and down hills and/or sudden acceleration).
Readiness
Monitor
Drive Pattern
Application
Tables
DRIVE PATTERN NUMBER*
O2S/AF
MODEL
YEAR
1996
1997
EGR
CATEGORY
1
MODEL
ENGINE
LS 400
GS 300
SC 400
SC 300
ES 300
LX 450
1UZ–FE
2JZ–GE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–GE
1MZ–FE
1FZ–FE
X
X
X
X
X
LS 400
GS 300
SC 400
SC 300
ES 300
LX 450
1UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–GE
1MZ–FE
1FZ–FE
X
X
X
X
X
CATALYST
4
SENSOR
EVAP
2
3
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
7
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
N/A
8
9
HTR
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
* Readiness Monitor Drive Patterns:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Page 2 of 15
EGR (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine)
EGR (For 1FZ–FE Engine)
Catalyst (O2S Type)
Catalyst (AF Sensor Type)
EVAP (Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type)
EVAP (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type)
7. EVAP (Without Leak Detection)
8. Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front & Rear O2S System)
9. Oxygen/AF Sensor Monitor (Front AF Sensor &
Rear O2S System)
10. Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive Pattern
Application
Tables
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NUMBER*
O2S/AF
EGR
MODEL
YEAR
MODEL
ENGINE
1998
LS 400
GS 300
SC 400
SC 300
1UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–GE
ES 300
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
LX 470
2UZ–FE
LS 400
GS 400
GS 300
SC 400
SC 300
ES 300
LX 470
RX 300
1UZ–FE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1MZ–FE
2UZ–FE
1MZ–FE
LS 400
GS 400
GS 300
SC 400
SC 300
ES 300
LX 470
RX 300
1UZ–FE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1MZ–FE
2UZ–FE
1MZ–FE
LS 430
GS 430
GS 300
IS 300
ES 300
LX 470
RX 300
3UZ–FE
3UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1MZ–FE
2UZ–FE
1MZ–FE
LS 430
GS 430
GS 300
SC 430
IS 300
ES 300
LX 470
RX 300
3UZ–FE
3UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
3UZ–FE
2JZ–FE
1MZ–FE
2UZ–FE
1MZ–FE
1999
2000
2001
2002
CATEGORY
1
CATALYST
2
N/A
Fed
CA
X
X
X
3
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
9
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
6
X
X
SENSOR
EVAP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
HTR
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
* Readiness Monitor Drive Patterns:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EGR (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine)
EGR (For 1FZ–FE Engine)
Catalyst (O2S Type)
Catalyst (AF Sensor Type)
EVAP (Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type)
EVAP (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type)
7. EVAP (Without Leak Detection)
8. Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front & Rear O2S System)
9. Oxygen/AF Sensor Monitor (Front AF Sensor &
Rear O2S System)
10. Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor
Page 3 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EGR Monitors
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 1: EGR Monitor (All Except 1FZ–FE Engine)
43 – 56 mph
(70 – 90 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up
10 min
(a)
3 – 5 min
(b)
3 – 5 min
(c)
3 – 5 min
3 – 5 min
(d)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
r IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to the DLC3 connector to check monitor status and
preconditions.
a. If IAT (Intake Air) is less than 50tF (10tC) when starting the engine, idle the
engine for approximately 10 minutes.
b. Drive the vehicle at 43 – 56 mph (70 – 90 km/h) for a period of 3 – 5 minutes.
NOTE:
r Do not allow the Throttle Position (TP) to exceed 30%.
r Drive with smooth throttle operation and avoid sudden acceleration.
c. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
d. Repeat steps “b” and “c” once.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “b” through “d.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 4 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EGR Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 2: EGR Monitor (for 1FZ–FE Engine)
43 – 56 mph
(70 – 90 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
3 – 5 min
(a)
3 – 5 min
(b)
3 – 5 min
3 – 5 min
(c)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
r IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.
r ECT (Coolant Temp) is less than 104tF (40tC).
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
a. Start the engine and as soon as safely possible begin driving the vehicle at 43 –
56 mph (70 – 90 km/h) for a period of 3 – 5 minutes.
NOTE:
r Do not allow the Throttle Position (TP) to exceed 30%.
r Drive with smooth throttle operation and avoid sudden acceleration.
b. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
c. Repeat steps “a” and “b” once.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “c.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 5 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Catalyst
Monitors
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 3: Catalyst Monitor (O2S Type)
40 – 50 mph
(64 – 88 km/h)
35 – 45 mph
(56 – 72 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up
ECT≥176tF
IAT < 50tF = 7 min
IAT > 50tF = 3 min
(a)
7 min
(b)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r ECT (Coolant Temp) is 176tF (80tC) or greater.
r IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.*
* For 2002 MY and later vehicles: The readiness test can be completed in cold ambient conditions
(less than 14tF / –10tC), if the drive pattern is repeated a second time after cycling the ignition OFF.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
Note the IAT (Intake Air) value during engine startup. The driving time must be adjusted
during step “a” based upon IAT (Intake Air) value at startup.
a. Drive the vehicle at 40 – 55 mph (64 – 88 km/h) for the time described below:
r If IAT (Intake Air) was less than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
drive for 7 minutes.
r If IAT (Intake Air) was greater than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
drive for 3 minutes.
b. Drive the vehicle at 35 – 45 mph (56 – 72 km/h) for approximately 7 minutes.
NOTE:
r Drive with smooth throttle operation.
r Avoid sudden acceleration.
r Avoid sudden deceleration as much as possible with the throttle fully closed.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” and “b.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 6 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Catalyst
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 4: Catalyst Monitor (AF Sensor Type)
40 – 50 mph
(64 – 88 km/h)
35 – 45 mph
(56 – 72 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up
ECT≥176tF
IAT < 50tF = 7min
IAT > 50tF = 3min
(a)
16 min
(b)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r ECT (Coolant Temp) is 176tF (80tC) or greater.
r IAT (Intake Air) is 14tF (–10tC) or greater.*
* For 2002 MY and later vehicles: The readiness test can be completed in cold ambient conditions
(less than 14tF / –10tC), if the drive pattern is repeated a second time after cycling the ignition OFF.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
Note the IAT (Intake Air) value during engine startup. The driving time must be adjusted
during step “a” based upon IAT (Intake Air) value at startup.
a. Drive the vehicle at 40 – 55 mph (64 – 88 km/h) for the time described below:
r If IAT (Intake Air) was less than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
drive for 7 minutes.
r If IAT (Intake Air) was greater than 50tF (10tC) when the engine was started,
drive for 3 minutes.
b. Drive the vehicle allowing speed to fluctuate between 35 – 45 mph (56 – 72 km/h)
for about 16 minutes.
NOTE:
r Drive with smooth throttle operation.
r Avoid sudden acceleration.
r Avoid sudden deceleration as much as possible with the throttle fully closed.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” and “b.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 7 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 5: EVAP Monitor
(Internal Pressure Monitor/Non–Intrusive Type)
45 mph
(72 km/h)
25 mph
(40 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up
ECT≥176tF
(1a)
Soak
(1b)
Cold Soak
5 min
(2a)
15 min
(2b)
Drive Pattern
Cold Soak Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
IMPORTANT:
A cold soak must be performed prior to conducting the drive pattern to complete the
Internal Pressure Readiness Monitor.
Cold Soak Procedure
1a. Start the engine and allow ECT (Coolant Temp) to reach 176tF (80tC) or greater.
(This can be done by letting the engine idle or by driving the vehicle.)
1b. Let the vehicle cold soak for 8 hours or until the difference between IAT (Intake
Air) and ECT (Coolant Temp) is less than 13tF (7tC).
H Example 1
r ECT (Coolant Temp) = 75tF (24tC).
r IAT (Intake Air) = 60tF (16tC).
r Difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is 15tF (8tC).
⇒ The monitor will not run because the difference between ECT (Coolant
Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is greater than 13tF (7tC).
H Example 2
r ECT (Coolant Temp) = 70tF (21tC).
r IAT (Intake Air) = 68tF (20tC).
r Difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is 2tF (1tC).
⇒ The monitor will run because the difference between ECT (Coolant Temp)
and IAT (Intake Air) is less than 13tF (7tC).
Page 8 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
Drive Pattern Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
r ECT (Coolant Temp) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
r IAT (Intake Air) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
r Cold Soak Procedure has been completed.
NOTE:
Before starting the engine, the difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake
Air) must be less than 13tF (7tC). (Refer to Examples 1 and 2 on previous page.)
Drive Pattern Procedure
r Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
r Release the pressure in the fuel tank by removing and then reinstalling the fuel tank
cap.
r Start the engine and begin driving as directed.
NOTE:
r Do not turn the ignition off until the drive pattern is complete.
r Drive on smooth roads to reduce excessive fuel sloshing.
2a. Start the engine and as soon as safely possible begin driving at approximately 45
mph (72km/h) for 5 minutes. (See illustration on previous page.)
2b. Drive the vehicle at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) for 15 minutes and include a
minimum of two stops for approximately 30 seconds. (See illustration on previous
page.)
The monitor should complete within approximately 20 minutes. If it does not, ensure
preconditions are met and repeat the drive pattern process beginning with the Cold Soak
Procedure.
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 9 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 6: EVAP Monitor (Vacuum Pressure Monitor/Intrusive Type)
3,000 rpm
Idling
IG SW off
Soak
(1a)
Warm up
(2a)
10 sec
(2b)
15 –50 min
(When the Readiness Monitor or
DTC is set, this test is complete.)
(2c)
Cold Soak Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
Cold Soak Procedure
1a. Let the vehicle cold soak for 8 hours or until the difference between IAT (Intake
Air) and ECT (Coolant Temp) is less than 13tF (7tC).
H Example 1
r ECT (Coolant Temp) = 75tF (24tC).
r IAT (Intake Air) = 60tF (16tC).
r Difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is 15tF (8tC).
⇒ The monitor will not run because the difference between ECT (Coolant
Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is greater than 13tF (7tC).
H Example 2
r ECT (Coolant Temp) = 70tF (21tC).
r IAT (Intake Air) = 68tF (20tC).
r Difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake Air) is 2tF (1tC).
⇒ The monitor will run because the difference between ECT (Coolant Temp)
and IAT (Intake Air) is less than 13tF (7tC).
Page 10 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
Drive Pattern Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Fuel level is between 1/2 to 3/4 full.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.*
r ECT (Coolant Temp) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).
r IAT (Intake Air) is between 40tF and 95tF (4.4tC – 35tC).*
r Cold Soak Procedure has been completed.
* For 2002 MY and later vehicles: The readiness test can be completed in cold ambient conditions
(less than 40tF / 4.4tC) and/or at high altitudes (more than 7800 feet / 2400 m) if the complete drive
pattern (including Cold Soak) is repeated a second time after cycling the ignition OFF.
NOTE:
Before starting the engine, the difference between ECT (Coolant Temp) and IAT (Intake
Air) must be less than 13tF (7tC). (Refer to Examples 1 and 2 on previous page.)
Drive Pattern Procedure
r Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
r Release the pressure in the fuel tank by removing and then reinstalling the fuel tank
cap.
2a. Start the engine and allow it to idle until ECT (Coolant Temp) is 167tF (75tC) or
greater. (See illustration on previous page.)
2b. Race the engine at 3,000 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. (See illustration on
previous page.)
2c. Allow the engine to idle with the A/C ON (to create a slight load) for 15 – 50
minutes. (See illustration on previous page.)
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with A/C put a slight load on the engine by doing the
following:
r Securely set the parking brake.
r Block the drive wheels with wheel chocks.
r Allow the vehicle to idle in drive for 15 – 50 minutes.
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 11 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
EVAP
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 7: EVAP Monitor (Without Leak Detection)
43 – 56 mph
(70 – 90 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
Warm up
ECT≥181tF
3 – 5 min
(a)
3 – 5 min
(b)
3 – 5 min
3 – 5 min
(c)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
r Altitude is 7800 feet (2400 m) or less.
r ECT (Coolant Temp) is 181tF (83tC) or greater.
r IAT (Intake Air) is 41tF (5tC) or greater.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
a. Drive the vehicle at 43 – 56 mph (70 – 90 km/h) for a period of 3 – 5 minutes.
NOTE:
r Do not allow the Throttle Position (TP) to exceed 30%.
r Drive with smooth throttle operation and avoid sudden acceleration.
b. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
c. Repeat steps “a” and “b” once.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “c.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 12 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Oxygen
Monitors
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 8: Oxygen Sensor Monitor (Front and Rear O2S System)
Once
Twice
3 times
10 times
25 mph
(40 km/h)
(over 900
rpm)
Idling
IG SW off
Over
2 min
(a)
Over
50 sec
(b)
Over
40
sec
(c)
Over
50 sec
Over
40
sec
50 sec
40
sec
50 sec
(d)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
a. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes or more.
b. Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for at least 50 seconds.
Be sure engine speed remains above 900 rpm.
c. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 40 seconds or more.
d. Perform steps “b” and “c” ten times.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “d.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 13 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Oxygen
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 9: Oxygen/Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitor
(Front AF Sensor and Rear O2S System)
40 – 70 mph
(64 – 112 km/h)
(900 – 3,200 rpm)
Once
25 mph
(40 km/h)
(over 900 rpm)
Twice
10 times
Over
40 sec
40 sec
Idling
IG SW off
Over
2 min
(a)
Over
3 min
(b)
Over
40 sec
(d)
Over
Over
10 sec
10 sec
(c)
(e)
Over
10 sec
(f)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
a. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes or more.
b. Drive the vehicle at 40 – 70 mph (64 – 112 km/h) or more for at least 3 minutes.
Be sure to maintain engine speed between 900 and 3,200 rpm.
c. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 10 seconds or more.
d. Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) for at least 40 seconds or more.
Be sure to maintain engine speed above 900 rpm.
e. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 10 seconds or more.
f.
Perform steps “d” and “e” ten times.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition switch OFF, then repeat steps “a” through “f.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 14 of 15
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERNS – EG002-02
Readiness
Monitor
Drive
Patterns:
Oxygen
Monitors
(Continued)
February 8, 2002
DRIVE PATTERN NO. 10: Oxygen/AF Sensor Heater Monitor
25 mph
(40 km/h)
Idling
IG SW off
9 min
(a)
2 min
(b)
Preconditions
The monitor will not run unless:
r MIL is OFF.
Drive Pattern Procedure
Connect the OBDII Scantool to DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions.
a. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 9 minutes.
b. Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for at least 2 minutes.
If readiness status does not switch to “complete,” ensure preconditions are met, turn the
ignition OFF, then repeat steps “a” and “b.”
NOTE:
The readiness status may not switch to “complete” after the first drive pattern trip if a
Pending Code has been set (first trip for a two–trip DTC).
r Pending Codes are available from the DTC Info Menu in Enhanced OBDII.
r Pending Codes indicate a POTENTIAL problem was detected. A second trip is
needed to confirm the DTC prior to diagnosis.
r Once a second trip is completed, a current DTC will be stored.
Page 15 of 15
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
May 29, 1998
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Parts
Information
CHARCOAL CANISTER
INTERCHANGEABILITY
Models:
’95 – ’98 ES 300
Charcoal Canister Assembly supply parts have been changed to simplify parts production
and permit interchangeability with current model vehicles.
S 1995 – 1998 model year ES 300.
The following table contains the part number replacement data for the involved models:
OLD PART NUMBER
NEW PART NUMBER
APPLICATION
77740–07011
77740–07012
9508–9604 prod. 96MY ES300
77740–33071
77740–33072
9604–9608 prod. 96MY ES300
77740–33061
77740–33062
9608– prod. 97–98 MY ES300
NOTE:
New part numbers are fully interchangeable with previous part numbers.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ENGINE
EG002–98
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION
Models:
All Models
March 28, 2005
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
Required
Equipment
The procedure for inspecting the radiator cap has been revised. Please refer to the
following procedures when inspecting the radiator cap on all Lexus models.
S All Lexus models.
MANUFACTURER
Snap–On/Sun
SVTS262A
(or equivalent)
EQUIPMENT
QTY
Cooling System Tester
(Radiator Cap Tester)
1
NOTE:
Additional Lexus Approved Dealer Equipment may be ordered by calling Lexus
Approved Dealer Equipment at 1–800–368–6787.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 7
ENGINE
EG007-05
Title:
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION – EG007-05
Required
SSTs
ITEM
NO.
March 28, 2005
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SSTs)
PART NUMBER
QTY
DRW**
1
Radiator Cap Test Set*
09230–00030–02
1
7
2
Radiator Cap Test Set (Small)*
09230–00020–02
1
7
* Essential SSTs.
** Refers to drawer number in SST Storage System.
NOTE:
Additional SSTs may be ordered by calling SPX/OTC at 1-800-933-8335.
Radiator Cap
Identification
Procedure
1. Use the illustration below to identify the vehicle’s radiator cap type and kPa rating.
2. Proceed to the required inspection procedure for the radiator cap and kPa rating.
Radiator Cap Identification
kPa Rating
N–Cap
Page 2 of 7
Compact Cap
Plastic Cap
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION – EG007-05
Radiator Cap
Inspection
Procedure
Type: N–cap, 88 kPa
March 28, 2005
N–Cap: 88 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign
material on rubber points “A,” “B,”
and “C.”
2. Check that points “A,” “B,” and “C”
are not deformed, cracked,
or swollen.
A
3. Check that points “C” and “D” are not
stuck together.
D
B
C
4. Apply engine coolant to points “B”
and “C” before using the radiator
cap tester.
S Radiator Cap Tester:
Snap–On/Sun P/N SVTS262A
(or equivalent)
5. Before installing the radiator cap
tester, use the applicable radiator cap
adaptor provided in the following SST
kits in conjunction with the radiator
cap tester:
S SST P/N 09230–00030–02
(09231–10080–01) or
09230–00020–02 (09231–10060–01)
6. When using the radiator cap tester,
tilt it more than 30 degrees.
Radiator Cap
Tester
7. Pump the radiator cap tester
several times, and check the
maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens
and read the gauge. The gauge must
be within the standard values listed
below when the pressure valve opens.
The cap is considered OK when the
pressure holds steady or falls very
slowly, but holds within the standard
values listed below for one minute.
30° or more
Radiator
Cap
Specification:
VALVE OPENING PRESSURE
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Standard value
(for brand–new cap)
74.0 to 103.0 kPa
(0.75 to 1.05 kgf/cm2, 10.7 to 14.9 psi)
Minimum standard value
(for in–service cap)
59 kPa (0.60 kgf/cm2, 8.53 psi)
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator
cap sub–assembly.
Page 3 of 7
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION – EG007-05
Radiator Cap
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
Type: N–cap, 108 kPa
March 28, 2005
N–Cap: 108 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign
material on rubber points “A,” “B,”
and “C.”
2. Check that points “A,” “B,” and “C”
are not deformed, cracked,
or swollen.
A
3. Check that points “C” and “D” are not
stuck together.
D
B
C
4. Apply engine coolant to points “B”
and “C” before using the radiator
cap tester.
S Radiator Cap Tester:
Snap–On/Sun P/N SVTS262A
(or equivalent)
5. Before installing the radiator cap
tester, use the applicable radiator cap
adaptor provided in the following SST
kits in conjunction with the radiator
cap tester:
S SST P/N 09230–00030–02
(09231–10080–01) or
09230–00020–02 (09231–10060–01)
6. When using the radiator cap tester,
tilt it more than 30 degrees.
Radiator Cap
Tester
7. Pump the radiator cap tester
several times, and check the
maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens
and read the gauge. The gauge must
be within the standard values listed
below when the pressure valve opens.
The cap is considered OK when the
pressure holds steady or falls very
slowly, but holds within the standard
values listed below for one minute.
30° or more
Radiator
Cap
Specification:
VALVE OPENING PRESSURE
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Standard value
(for brand–new cap)
93.3 to 122.7 kPa
(0.95 to 1.25 kgf/cm2, 13.5 to 17.8 psi)
Minimum standard value
(for in–service cap)
78.5 kPa (0.80 kgf/cm2, 11.38 psi)
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator
cap sub–assembly.
Page 4 of 7
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION – EG007-05
Radiator Cap
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
Type: Compact Cap, 88 kPa
March 28, 2005
Compact Cap: 88 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign
material on rubber points “A,” “B,”
and “C.”
2. Check that points “A” and “B”
are not deformed, cracked,
or swollen.
3. Check that points “B” and “C” are not
stuck together.
A
B
C
4. Apply engine coolant to point “B”
before using the radiator
cap tester.
S Radiator Cap Tester:
Snap–On/Sun P/N SVTS262A
(or equivalent)
5. Before installing the radiator cap
tester, use the applicable radiator cap
adaptor provided in the following SST
kits in conjunction with the radiator
cap tester:
S SST P/N 09230–00030–02
(09231–10080–01) or
09230–00020–02 (09231–10060–01)
6. When using the radiator cap tester,
tilt it more than 30 degrees.
Radiator Cap
Tester
7. Pump the radiator cap tester
several times, and check the
maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens
and read the gauge. The gauge must
be within the standard values listed
below when the pressure valve opens.
The cap is considered OK when the
pressure holds steady or falls very
slowly, but holds within the standard
values listed below for one minute.
30° or more
Radiator
Cap
Specification:
VALVE OPENING PRESSURE
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Standard value
(for brand–new cap)
74.0 to 103.0 kPa
(0.75 to 1.05 kgf/cm2, 10.7 to 14.9 psi)
Minimum standard value
(for in–service cap)
59 kPa (0.60 kgf/cm2, 8.53 psi)
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator
cap sub–assembly.
Page 5 of 7
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION – EG007-05
Radiator Cap
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
Type: Compact Cap, 108 kPa
March 28, 2005
Compact Cap: 108 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign
material on rubber points “A,” “B,”
and “C.”
2. Check that points “A” and “B”
are not deformed, cracked,
or swollen.
3. Check that points “B” and “C” are not
stuck together.
A
B
C
4. Apply engine coolant to point “B”
before using the radiator
cap tester.
S Radiator Cap Tester:
Snap–On/Sun P/N SVTS262A
(or equivalent)
5. Before installing the radiator cap
tester, use the applicable radiator cap
adaptor provided in the following SST
kits in conjunction with the radiator
cap tester:
S SST P/N 09230–00030–02
(09231–10080–01) or
09230–00020–02 (09231–10060–01)
6. When using the radiator cap tester,
tilt it more than 30 degrees.
Radiator Cap
Tester
7. Pump the radiator cap tester
several times, and check the
maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens
and read the gauge. The gauge must
be within the standard values listed
below when the pressure valve opens.
The cap is considered OK when the
pressure holds steady or falls very
slowly, but holds within the standard
values listed below for one minute.
30° or more
Radiator
Cap
Specification:
VALVE OPENING PRESSURE
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Standard value
(for brand–new cap)
93.3 to 122.7 kPa
(0.95 to 1.25 kgf/cm2, 13.5 to 17.8 psi)
Minimum standard value
(for in–service cap)
78.5 kPa (0.80 kgf/cm2, 11.38 psi)
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator
cap sub–assembly.
Page 6 of 7
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION – EG007-05
Radiator Cap
Inspection
Procedure
(Continued)
Type: Plastic Cap, 108 kPa
March 28, 2005
Plastic Cap: 108 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign
material on O–ring “A.”
2. Check that O–ring “A” is not
deformed, cracked, or swollen.
3. Apply engine coolant to O–ring “A”
and rubber point “B” before using the
radiator cap tester.
B
S Radiator Cap Tester:
Snap–On/Sun P/N SVTS262A
(or equivalent)
A
4. Before installing the radiator cap
tester, use the applicable radiator cap
adaptor provided in the following SST
kits in conjunction with the radiator
cap tester:
S SST P/N 09230–00030–02
(09231–10080–01) or
09230–00020–02 (09231–10060–01)
5. When using the radiator cap tester,
tilt it more than 30 degrees.
Radiator Cap
Tester
6. Pump the radiator cap tester
several times, and check the
maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
30° or more
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens
and read the gauge. The gauge must
be within the standard values listed
below when the pressure valve opens.
The cap is considered OK when the
pressure holds steady or falls very
slowly, but holds within the standard
values listed below for one minute.
Radiator
Cap
Specification:
VALVE OPENING PRESSURE
SPECIFIED CONDITION
Standard value
(for brand–new cap)
93.3 to 122.7 kPa
(0.95 to 1.25 kgf/cm2, 13.5 to 17.8 psi)
Minimum standard value
(for in–service cap)
78.5 kPa (0.80 kgf/cm2, 11.38 psi)
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator
cap sub–assembly.
Page 7 of 7
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
September 3, 2004
Introduction
ENGINE BANK 1 AND BANK 2 A/F AND
O2 IDENTIFICATION
Models:
Applicable Models
This service bulletin provides information on the proper identification of engine bank 1
and engine bank 2 for correct A/F sensor and oxygen sensor replacement.
This bulletin contains information that identifies engine bank 1 and engine bank 2 on the
following engines: 1MZ–FE, 3MZ–FE, 1UZ–FE, 2UZ–FE and 3UZ–FE.
S Bank 1 (B1) refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 1.
S Bank 2 (B2) refers to the bank opposite bank 1.
S Sensor 1 (S1) refers to the sensor that is located before the catalytic converters.
S Sensor 2 (S2) refers to the sensor that is located after the catalytic converters.
Applicable
Vehicles
S 1994 – 2003 model year ES 300 vehicles equipped with 1MZ–FE engine.
S 2004 model year ES 330 and RX 330 vehicles equipped with 3MZ–FE engine.
S 1998 – 2000 model year GS 400 vehicles equipped with 1UZ–FE engine.
S 2003 – 2004 model year GX 470 vehicles equipped with 2UZ–FE engine.
S 1990 – 2000 model year LS 400 vehicles equipped with 1UZ–FE engine.
S 2001 – 2004 model year LS 430 and GS 430 vehicles equipped with
3UZ–FE engine.
S 1998 – 2004 model year LX 470 vehicles equipped with 2UZ–FE engine.
S 1999 – 2003 model year RX 300 vehicles equipped with 1MZ–FE engine.
S 1992 – 2000 model year SC 400 vehicles equipped with 1UZ–FE engine.
S 2002 – 2004 model year SC 430 vehicles equipped with 3UZ–FE engine.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 3
ENGINE
EG010-04
Title:
ENGINE BANK 1 AND BANK 2 A/F AND O2 IDENTIFICATION – EG010-04
Engine Bank
Identification
September 3, 2004
1UZ–FE, 2UZ–FE and 3UZ–FE Engine Bank Identification
Bank 2
Bank 1
No. 8
Cylinder
No. 7
Cylinder
No. 6
Cylinder
No. 5
Cylinder
No. 4
Cylinder
No. 3
Cylinder
No. 2
Cylinder
No. 1
Cylinder
Front of Vehicle
1MZ–FE and 3MZ–FE Engine Bank Identification
Bank 1
No. 1
Cylinder
No. 3
Cylinder
No. 2
Cylinder
No. 4
Cylinder
Front of Vehicle
Bank 2
Page 2 of 3
No. 5
Cylinder
No. 6
Cylinder
ENGINE BANK 1 AND BANK 2 A/F AND O2 IDENTIFICATION – EG010-04
Engine Bank
Identification
(Continued)
September 3, 2004
5VZ–FE and 1GR–FE Engine Bank Identification
Bank 1
Bank 2
No. 6
Cylinder
No. 5
Cylinder
No. 4
Cylinder
No. 3
Cylinder
No. 2
Cylinder
No. 1
Cylinder
Front of Vehicle
A/F and O2
Sensor
Identification
Sensor Identification (Example of FWD V6)
A/F Sensor
(Bank 2, Sensor 1)
(B2, S1)
A/F Sensor
(Bank 1, Sensor 1)
(B1, S1)
Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Bank 1, Sensor 2)
(B1, S2)
TWC
Front of Vehicle
Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Bank 2, Sensor 2)
(B2, S2)
Page 3 of 3
WIRELESS OPERATION IMPROVEMENT
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
Models:
’97 – ’99 ES 300
February 4, 2000
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
The antenna matching in the Door Control Receiver has been changed to improve the
operating range of the wireless trunk opener function on 1997–1999 ES 300 vehicles.
S 1997 – 1999 ES 300 vehicles produced before the VIN’s listed below.
Production
Change
Information
Parts
Information
Repair
Procedure
MODEL
ENDING VIN
1999 ES 300
JT8BF28G * X0168000
1999 ES 300
JT8BF28G * X5059850
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
89741–33150
89741–33151
Door Control Receiver
1. Replace the Door Control Receiver using the part number specified.
2. Route the wire harness away from the ECU to assure the best performance.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
891101
R & R Door Control Receiver
0.3
89741–33150
T1
T2
87 99
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
EL001–00
Title:
Models:
’97 – ’01 ES 300
May 4, 2001
Applicable
Vehicles
Production
Change
Information
Parts
Information
Repair
Procedure
Warranty
Information
Some 1997 – 2001 model year ES 300 vehicles may exhibit a condition in which turn
signals on one side of the vehicle (either left or right) flash at a different rate than the
other side. To correct this situation, the shape of the front turn signal socket has been
modified to improve the ground circuit of the bulb.
S 1997 – 2001 model year ES 300 vehicles built prior to the VINs specified below.
MODEL/PLANT
STARTING VIN
MCV20 (Tsutsumi Plant)
JT8BF28G#10293663
MCV20 (TMK Plant)
JT8BF28G#15105850
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
99159–10332
90075–60051
Plug Assy, Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Replace the front turn signal plug assembly, on the side that operates abnormally.
2. Inspect the bulb. If wear is visible on the bottom contacts and/or side contact, replace
the bulb.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
EL1010
R & R Front Turn Signal Plug Assembly
0.3
99159–10332
T1
T2
87 41
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in-service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
TURN SIGNALS FLASHING
ABNORMALLY
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
Introduction
EL001-01
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
CIGARETTE LIGHTER SERVICE
Models:
All Model
April 10, 1998
Introduction
Service
Procedure
ELECTRICAL
EL005–98
Title:
When receiving customer complaints to repair the lighter or lighter socket, please
carefully investigate the cause of the failure to prevent further occurrences. If the
customer uses the wrong size lighter element or power accessory plug, damage may
occur to the lighter socket. When applicable, instruct the customer to replace the lighter
element with original equipment components or to use an appropriate sized accessory
plug. Dimensional information included within this document will instruct you on
component specifications.
1. Determine if the lighter is original equipment by using the specifications shown.
a. If the vehicle has a non–genuine lighter element, it has the possibility to cause
a short circuit between the lighter element and the lighter socket, which can
result in an open fuse.
b. A non–genuine lighter element may cause a rattle or bend the socket bimetal
contacts.
c. If a non–genuine lighter element is being used, advise the customer to use an
original equipment element.
DRAWING WITH DIMESIONS
Knob
8.4 mm (0.33”)
FEATURES
Bimetal
17.7–17.8 mm
(0.697–0.7”)
TYPE
Genuine
22.5 mm (0.88”)Ash
No Problem to use.
Plate
Heater Element
Heater Head
Guard
20.7 mm
(0.81”)
13 mm (0.51”)
Non–Genuine
25.5 mm (1.0”)
20.8 mm
(0.82”)
11 mm (0.43”)
24 mm (0.94”)
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Too long an ash guard will
contact bimetal (positive
circuit) plate and cause fuse
to melt.
Excessive free play on the
heater head which allows
contact between heater
element, socket body and
bimetal plate, will cause fuse
to melt.
Page 1 of 2
CIGARETTE LIGHTER SERVICE – EL005–98
b. Using a power plug larger
than the given dimensions
may damage the lighter
socket.
< 20.5 mm
(0.81”)
> 15 mm
(0.59”)
25 – 30 mm
(0.79 – 1.18”)
> 2 Terminals
< 20.5 mm
(0.81”)
a. The attached specifications in
the drawing provide the
maximum recommended size
of accessory plug. If the
customer is using an
accessory plug larger than
recommended, please advise
the customer to use a plug of
appropriate size.
Recommended Accessory Plug Shape
< 13 mm
(0.51”)
2. If the lighter element is original
equipment and the lighter socket is
bent or pulled out of the dash, please
ask the customer about the accessory
plug being used in the lighter socket.
< 13 mm
(0.51”)
Service
Procedure
(Continued)
April 10, 1998
> 8.5 mm
(0.33”)
25 – 30 mm
(0.79 – 1.18”)
c. If the vehicle has a power
point socket, advise the
customer to use this socket
instead of the lighter socket.
Affected
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
Page 2 of 2
S All models, all model years
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
AC001–97
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR
Models:
’92–96 ES 300, ’93–’94 LS 400,
All GS 300, SC 300/400, LX 450.
September 12, 1997
Introduction
A musty odor may be emitted from the air conditioning system of some vehicles which are
usually operated in areas with high temperature and humidity. It is most noticeable when
the air conditioner is first turned “ON” after the vehicle has been parked for several hours.
The odor could result from one or more of the following conditions:
1. Blockage of the evaporator housing drain pipe, resulting in the build up of condensation.
2. Microbial growth in the evaporator, arising from dampness in the evaporator housing
where the cooling air flow is dehumidified.
To address excessive air conditioning evaporator odor, check the evaporator housing drain
pipe for blockage. If no problems are found, the evaporator and housing should be cleaned
and disinfected using the general procedure given on page 2, and the model specific
procedure on the pages indicated in the Table of Contents at the bottom of this page.
Affected
Vehicles
Tools &
Materials
S
While this procedure may be used on any Lexus vehicle, this bulletin gives details
specifically for the ’92–’96 ES 300, all GS 300, ’93–’94 LS 400, all SC 300/400 and the
LX 450.
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION OF TOOLS & MATERIALS
QUANTITY
SOURCE
08821–00810–01
Spray Gun Kit
1
OTC
08821–00811–01
Spray Gun (replacement)
(1)
OTC
08821–00812–01
Spray Gun Nozzle (replacement)
(1)
OTC
08821–00813–01
Freshener Mixing Container (replacement)
(1)
OTC
08821–00801–DS
Air Conditioning Freshener
1 per vehicle
TMS
CAUTION:
Wear safety glasses, protective mask, and gloves while working with the
freshener.
Warranty
Information
Table of
Contents
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
N/A
No applicable warranty information
–
–
MODEL
PAGE
GENERAL
2
T1
T2
–
–
MODEL
PAGE
MODEL
PAGE
MODEL
PAGE
ES 300
3
GS 300
5
LS 400
7
SC 300
9
SC 400
9
LX 450
11
General Procedure applies to all models and model years.
The Specific Model Sections cover only the listed “affected models.”
Page 1 of 11
HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING
TSIB
Title:
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
General
Procedure
September 12, 1997
1. Preparation of freshener solution:
(a) Invert freshener container and shake vigorously for 30 seconds.
(b) Mix 3.4 fl. oz. of freshener (1 container) with 30 fl. oz. to make 1 qt. of solution.
2. Drying the evaporator:
S Dry the evaporator for 10 minutes with the following settings:
A/C: . . . . . . . . . . . Off
Air Outlet: . . . . . . Foot
Mode: . . . . . . . . . . Recirc.
Blower: . . . . . . . . High
Temp: . . . . . . . . . . Max Warm
3. Evaporator Treatment Preparation:
(a) Ensure availability of 30–45 psi compressed air to be used with spray gun
for application of freshener.
(b) Place a tray under the evaporator housing drain hose to collect used cleaning
solution.
(c) Place shop cloth under the evaporator housing in the vehicle to prevent cleaning
solution from dripping onto the floor mat.
4. Vehicle Preparation: See specific model section.
5. Evaporator treatment:
(a) Set HVAC mode as follows:
A/C: . . . . . . . . . . . Off
Air Outlet: . . . . . . Face
Mode: . . . . . . . . . . Fresh
Blower: . . . . . . . . High
Temp: . . . . . . . . . . Max Warm
Windows: . . . . . . Open
(b) Insert spray nozzle into the filter inlet
and spray the entire quantity (1 qt.) of
freshener solution into the evaporator
while moving the nozzle around to
cover the complete evaporator surface.
(c) Turn the blower OFF.
6. Reinstallation of Parts.
7. Completion of Treatment.
(a) Dry the evaporator for 30 minutes with
the following settings:
A/C: . . . . . . . . . . . Off
Air Outlet: . . . . . . Foot
Mode: . . . . . . . . . . Recirc.
Blower: . . . . . . . . High
Temp: . . . . . . . . . . Max Warm
Windows: . . . . . . Closed
(b) If the vehicle still has alcohol smell, open
windows for ventilation. Do not turn on
the AC switch until the evaporator is
completely dry as this can reduce the
effectiveness of the solution.
Page 2 of 11
CAUTION
Do not get into the vehicle during
this drying operation.
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
ES 300
(’92–’96)
September 12, 1997
1. Removal of parts.
(a) Pull down the carpet from the center
console as indicated by red arrow in the
illustration.
(b) Remove the plate on the side of the
heater unit using steps ¬ and ­,
indicated with red arrows to show
direction, in the illustration.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the cable.
NOTE:
The Plate will be reused.
(c) Remove the filter.
(d) Remove the blower controller.
2. Clean the Evaporator.
S
Follow the general procedures given
on page 2.
NOTE:
Location for insertion of spray nozzle
is indicated by the red arrow in the
illustration.
Page 3 of 11
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR – AC001–97
ES 300
(’92–’96)
(Continued)
3. Reinstallation of parts.
(a) Insert the filter (up side) into the
heater unit following the numbered
steps shown in the illustration.
(b) Insert the filter (down side) into the
heater unit.
(c) Reinstall the plate on the side of the
heater unit using steps ¬ and ­,
indicated with red arrows to show
direction, in the illustration.
CAUTION:
Confirm that the plate is secure.
(d) Restore the carpet to its original
position taking care not to bend
the cable.
Page 4 of 11
September 12, 1997
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
GS 300
September 12, 1997
1. Removal of parts.
(a) Remove the undercover.
NOTE:
Pull down the clip areas (3 places) of
the Undercover to remove.
(b) Remove the lamp.
(c) Remove the (2) wing nuts and the
plate on the bottom of the cooling
unit.
CAUTION:
The plate and wing nuts will be reused.
(d) Remove the (2) filters from the cooling
unit.
2. Clean the Evaporator.
S
Follow the general procedures given on
page 2.
NOTE:
Location for insertion of spray nozzle is
indicated by the red arrow in the
illustration.
Page 5 of 11
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
GS 300
(Continued)
3. Reinstallation of parts.
(a) Insert the (2) filters into the cooling
unit as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Insert a clean air filter with it’s knob
facing downwards, then slide it forward
and install the second filter in the same
manner.
(b) Assemble the rubber insulator on the
plate.
CAUTION:
To prevent the cooling unit from leaking
water, pull the three rubber projections
from the other side of the plate to make
sure that the rubber insulator seals
properly against the plate.
(c) Install the plate on the cooling unit
and secure with the (2) wing nuts.
CAUTION:
To prevent water leaks, verify that the
cooling unit and plate are fully secure
before tightening the wing nuts.
NOTE:
Before installing the plate on the cooling
unit, coat the rubber insulator with water
for easier assembly.
(d) Reinstall the lamp.
(e) Reassemble the Undercover.
Page 6 of 11
September 12, 1997
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
LS 400
(’93–’94)
September 12, 1997
1. Removal of parts.
(a) Remove the undercover.
NOTE:
S Remove the front of “A” clips.
S Pull down the three “B” clip areas
of the Undercover to remove.
(b) Remove the lamp.
(c) Remove the (2) wing nuts and the plate
on the bottom of the cooling unit.
CAUTION:
The plate and wing nuts will be reused.
(d) Remove the (2) filters from the cooling
unit.
2. Clean the Evaporator
S
Follow the general procedures given on
page 2.
NOTE:
Location for the insertion of spray
nozzle is indicated by the red arrow
in the illustration.
Page 7 of 11
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
LS 400
(’93–’94)
(Continued)
3. Reinstallation of parts.
(a) Insert the (2) filters into the cooling
unit as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Insert a clean air filter with it’s knob
facing downwards, then slide it forward
and install the second filter in the same
manner.
(b) Assemble the rubber insulator on the
plate.
CAUTION:
To prevent the cooling unit from leaking
water, pull the three rubber projections
from the other side of the plate to make
sure that the rubber insulator seals
properly against the plate.
(c) Install the plate on the cooling unit and
secure with the (2) wing nuts.
CAUTION:
To prevent water leaks, verify that the
cooling unit and plate are fully secure
before tightening the wing nuts.
NOTE:
Before installing the plate on the
cooling unit, coat the rubber insulator
with water for easier assembly.
(d) Reinstall the lamp.
(e) Reassemble the Undercover.
Page 8 of 11
September 12, 1997
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
SC 300
SC 400
September 12, 1997
1. Removal of parts.
(a) Remove two clips using the clip
remover then remove the undercover.
NOTE:
Pull down the clip areas (4 places) of
the Undercover to remove.
(b) Remove the (2) wing nuts and the plate
on the bottom of the cooling unit.
CAUTION:
The plate and wing nuts will be reused.
(c) Remove the (2) filters from the cooling
unit.
2. Clean the Evaporator
S
Follow the general procedures given on
page 2.
NOTE:
Location for the insertion of spray
nozzle is indicated by the red arrow
in the illustration.
Page 9 of 11
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
SC 300
SC 400
(Continued)
3. Reinstallation of parts.
(a) Insert the (2) filters into the cooling
unit as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Insert a clean air filter with it’s knob
facing downwards, then slide it forward
and install the second filter in the same
manner.
(b) Assemble the rubber insulator on the
plate.
CAUTION:
To prevent the cooling unit from leaking
water, pull the three rubber projections
from the other side of the plate to make
sure that the rubber insulator seals
properly against the plate.
(c) Install the plate on the cooling unit and
secure with the (2) wing nuts.
CAUTION:
To prevent water leaks, verify that the
cooling unit and plate are fully secure
before tightening the wing nuts.
NOTE:
Before installing the plate on the
cooling unit, coat the rubber insulator
with water for easier assembly.
(d) Reassemble the Undercover.
Page 10 of 11
September 12, 1997
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR ODOR – AC001–97
LX 450
September 12, 1997
1. Removal of parts.
(a) Remove the glove compartment door.
(b) Remove the A/C Amplifier.
(c) Remove power transistor.
2. Clean the Evaporator
S
Follow the general procedures given on
page 2.
3. Reinstallation of parts.
S
Reinstall the parts in reverse order
of removal described in step 1.
Page 11 of 11
REF:
NO:
HEATING & AIR
CONDITIONING
AC003-96
DATE:
JUNE 7, 1996
MODEL: ALL MODELS
Title A/C COMPRESSOR MAINTENANCE FOR STORED VEHICLES
Page 1 of 1
When a vehicle is stored for a long period, the volume of oil in the A/C compressor may decrease
due to oil flow into the condenser, pipes, etc.
If the A/C system is turned on at high engine RPM after a long storage period, A/C compressor
damage may result.
To minimize the possibility of damage to the A/C compressor while storing a vehicle, perform the
following recommended procedure at least once a month to lubricate the compressor.
RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR A/C COMPRESSOR LUBRICATION:
1. Turn off A/C And blower switches prior to starting engine.
2. Start and warm–up engine until engine speed drops below 1,000 RPM.
3. Turn on the A/C system using the following settings:
D
A/C switch: On
D
Blower Speed: High
D
Engine speed: Below 1,000 RPM
4. Keep A/C on with engine idling for 30 seconds.
5. Turn off A/C system and stop engine.
REF:
AUDIO
NO:
AU001–96
DATE:
AUGUST 23, 1996
MODEL: ALL MODELS
Title STATIC NOISE ON WEAK AM STATIONS
Page 1 of 3
Some Lexus audio systems may exhibit audible electrical noise on weak AM stations when various
electrical accesssories (turn signals, rear defogger, cruise control, brakes, etc.) are operated.
Poor antenna grounding can cause this condition.
To eliminate or reduce the intensity of the noise use the following repair procedure:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Play the radio on a strong, static–free AM
station and slowly move the tip of the antenna mast forward and back approximately
2 inches (Fig. 1). If static noise is not
heard, go to Step 2. If static noise is heard
during antenna movement, replace the antenna mast and go to Step 3.
NOTE: Do not touch the antenna mast with
your bare hands. Use a glove or nonmetallic object to move the antenna. (If
you touch the antenna with your hands,
you will change the antenna sensitivity).
2. Remove the antenna mast and inspect the
base of the mast for corrosion and damage.
Clean with 1500 grit sandpaper (Fig. 2).
3.
Remove the antenna assembly and inspect the inner fender around the antenna
hole for corrosion. Clean with 1500 grit
sandpaper (Fig. 3).
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 1
Inspection
Area
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 2
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 3
STATIC NOISE ON WEAK AM STATIONS
Page 2 of 3
REPAIR PROCEDURE (Cont’d):
4. Remove the antenna spacer grommet at
the top of the antenna assembly and inspect for corrosion. Clean with 1500 grit
sandpaper ( Fig. 4).
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Inspection
Area
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 4
Ç
Ç
5. Reinstall the antenna assembly. Be sure to
install the external antenna nut (escutcheon) first. Then install the nut which holds
the assembly to the inner bracket ( Fig. 5).
2
Ç
Ç
1
Push
6. Check to make sure that the teeth on the
antenna spacer grommet make good contact with the inner fender well (Fig. 6).
Ç
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
3
Fig. 5
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Antenna
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Fender
7. Inspect the antenna cable connection and
clean as necessary. Reconnect the antenna cable, the wire harness and the drain
hose (Fig. 7).
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Inspection
Area
Teeth
Fig. 6
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 7
STATIC NOISE ON WEAK AM STATIONS
Page 3 of 3
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
EL5001
Listed TSIB repair procedure
(All Items)
1.0
86300–XXXXX
76
73
May 16, 1997
Introduction
All Models
AUDIO
Models:
AU001–97
CLEANING CASSETTE TAPE HEADS
AND CAPSTANS
REVISED
TSIB
Title:
The cassette tape head and capstan should be cleaned regularly to prevent poor sound
quality and/or cassettes from jamming.
Fig. 1
Conditions
The following conditions can easily be avoided by regularly cleaning the head with a tape
cleaner and only using good quality cassettes.
Poor Sound
Quality due to
Dirty Head
Since the tape head contacts the cassette tape, the tape head accumulates metal oxides
and dirt particles from the tape. In time, a layer of dirt forms on the tape head resulting in
poor transfer of information between the tape and the tape head. This typically causes a
reduction of higher frequencies or a reduction of the brightness in sound quality.
Tape Speed
Tape speed is controlled by the tape capstan and pinch rollers. If the capstan and pinch
rollers accumulate dirt, the tape may slip causing the music to play too fast or too slow.
Jamming
Dirt can make the capstans sticky, causing the tape to become entangled in the cassette
mechanism. This can cause the cassette to become jammed in the player.
Cassette
Tape Head
Cleaners
To reduce the occurrence of these conditions, the following approved cassette cleaners are
available through the non–parts system (Material Distribution Center).
TOOLS & MATERIALS
MATERIAL NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Allsop 3 Cassette Recorder Cleaner
00113–AS710–00
Cleaning Cassette and Cleaning
Solution with Instruction Sheet
NOTE:
Allow 15 minutes for the cleaning fluid to evaporate before playing a tape.
Page 1 of 2
CLEANING CASSETTE TAPE HEADS AND CAPSTANS – AU001–97 (Revised)
Cassette
Tape Care
Procedure
May 16, 1997
The following precautions should be taken to keep cassettes in good condition:
1. Remove the cassette from the player when the cassette is not in use.
2. Store the cassette in its case.
3. Store the cassette in a cool, dry area away from direct sunlight and magnetic components
such as speakers.
4. Avoid touching the tape itself. This could result in poor sound quality or sound drop out.
5. Keep the tape tightly wound as shown in
figure 2. Tape speed can be affected by
loosely wound tape.
Fig. 2
6. Avoid inserting a cassette into the player if
the cassette label is loose or peeling as
shown in figure 3. This can cause a
cassette to become stuck in the player.
Fig. 3
7. Use cassettes that are 90 minutes or less
in length. Cassettes over 90 minutes use
extremely thin tape that is subject to
stretch, resulting in poor sound quality.
Fig. 4
Page 2 of 2
Models:
All Models
February 21, 1997
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Parts
Information
A kit containing special foam sponge material has been developed. This kit, when used
in conjunction with procedures outlined in the Interior and Wind Noise Diagnosis Manual
(P/N 00246-30015) and Lexus Service Information Bulletins, should enable effective
wind noise repairs.
• All Models
PART NUMBER
PART NAME
SIZE (MM)
QTY
08231Ć00810
Kit, Wind Noise
---
1
08231Ć00811*
Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 1
297 x 150 (T = 3.0)
2
08231Ć00812*
Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 2
297 x 150 (T = 5.0)
2
08231Ć00813*
Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 3
297 x 150 (T = 10.0)
2
08231Ć00814*
Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 4
297 x 150 (T = 3.0)
2
08231Ć00815*
Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 5
297 x 150 (T = 5.0)
2
08231Ć00816*
Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 6
297 x 150 (T = 5.0)
2
* All of these parts are included in the kit.
Kit
Components
1. Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 1, No. 2
and No. 3 (Ept-sealer).
2. Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 4 and No. 5
(Ept-sealer). This sheet is divided into
27 strips, 5 mm wide.
3. Caulking Sponge Sealant No. 6 (Eptsealer).
Page 1 of 1
BODY
WIND NOISE REPAIR KIT
BO001-97
TSIB
Title:
REF:
BODY
NO:
BO002–96
DATE:
AUGUST 9, 1996
MODEL:
ALL MODELS
Title STAINS ON RAPGARD APPLIED AREAS
Page 1 of 1
On some Lexus models, when Rapgard is removed from the vehicle, a stain is left on the paint surface. This stain can be seen under the clear coat and is not a defect of the clear coat. The stain corresponds to a wrinkled area of Rapgard which retained liquids, such as window washer fluid, that left
a discoloration.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
To remove a stain from a vehicle, heat the stain surface to a temperature of 70_C – 80_C. When the
stain is removed it will not reappear.
Equipment –
1. Infrared lamp or dryer to heat the surface.
2. Aluminum foil or a damp cloth to protect plastic parts from deformation.
Procedure –
1. Apply aluminum foil to adjoining plastic parts or cool with damp cloth periodically.
2. Use an infrared lamp or dryer on the stain developed area and heat for 5 to 10 minutes at
70_C – 80_C.
3. After heating for 5 minutes, check whether the stain has disappeared. If the stain still
remains, reheat the area and check again.
NOTE:
Take care that the body’s paint surface temperature does not become too high.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
OPCODE
BD6004
DESCRIPTION
Remove stains from paint surface
caused by Rapgard
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
0.6
53301–XXXXX
61
99
REF:
BODY
NO:
BO003–96
DATE:
NOVEMBER 15, 1996
MODEL:
ALL MODELS
Title SEAT BELT EXTENDERS FOR 1993 THROUGH 1997 MODELS
Page 1 of 6
Lexus customers who find it necessary to increase the length of their seat belts may obtain Seat Belt
Extenders at no cost through their local Lexus dealer.
D The extender is available in black only, in 6, 9, 12, 15 and 18 inch lengths.
D Owners are informed of the seat belt extender availability through the Lexus Owner’s Manual
included in each vehicle.
The customer (individual requiring the extender) must visit a Lexus Dealership to have the required
measurements made and to complete the seat belt extender worksheet. The worksheet will allow the
proper fitting and selection of a seat belt extender for the customer. The dealership personnel should then
determine the applicable part number and place a Critical Order through the TDN Parts Network.
Included in this bulletin is the information covering the1993 through 1997 model years:
Contents
Page
Flow Chart
2
Application/Part Number
3
Owner Instruction Sheet
4
Statement from Owner’s Manual
5
Seat Belt Extender Worksheet
6
The dealership service department should complete the affixed Seat Belt Extender Label and review the
“owner instruction sheet” with the customer. The dealership should give a copy of the completed worksheet to the customer and keep the original in the customer’s file.
To assure utmost owner satisfaction, it is recommended that a dealership designate one person to coordinate all activities related to the seat belt extender issue.
From past sales history, it is recommended that dealerships do not stock seat belt extenders due to low
demand and the need for customer fitting.
SEAT BELT EXTENDER FOR 1993 THROUGH 1997 MODELS
Page 2 of 6
PROCEDURE:
1. Owner requests a seat belt extender from the dealer.
2. Dealer verifies the need for a seat belt extender, obtains a current copy of the TSB, and copies the
worksheet.
3. Dealer measures the customer and completes the worksheet. Dealer determines the correct part
number and places a Critical Order for the part through the TDN Parts Network.
4. Dealer receives the seat belt extender and calls the customer in to check fit of the part.
5. If the seat belt extender fit is OK, dealership personnel complete the customer information label on the
part, explains usage of the part to customer, then gives customer a copy of the completed worksheet.
6. Dealer places a copy of the completed worksheet in the customer’s records.
DEALER
MEASURE
CUSTOMER &
COMPLETE
WORKSHEET
PLACE
CRITICAL
ORDER
THROUGH
TDN
ăPARTS
SUPPLY
SHIP SEAT
BELT
EXTENDER
TO DEALER
ąąDEALER
TEST FIT
CUSTOMER
WITH PART
ąąąOWNER
COMPLETE
LABEL AND
ADVISE
OWNER
FILE
WORKSHEET
IN CUSTOMER
RECORDS
SEAT BELT EXTENDER (SBE) FLOW CHART
SAMPLE SEAT BELT LABEL:
RECEIVE
COPY OF
WORKSHEET
& USE
EXTENDER
SEAT BELT EXTENDER FOR 1993 THROUGH 1997 MODELS
Page 3 of 6
PART NUMBER INFORMATION:
Locate the series code on the series application charts, then use the part number by length chart to
identify the correct part number for the specific customer.
FRONT SEAT EXTENDER SERIES APPLICATION TABLE:
Model
1997 1996 1995 1994 1993
LS 400
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
GS 300
N-3
N-3
N-3
N-3
N-3
SC 400
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
SC 300
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
ES 300
R-5
K-4
K-4
K-4
K-4
LX 450
R-3
R-3
-
-
-
REAR SEAT EXTENDER SERIES APPLICATION TABLE:
Model
1997 1996 1995 1994 1993
LS 400
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
GS 300
K-4
K-4
K-4
K-4
K-4
SC 400
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
SC 300
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
ES 300.. Right & Left
R-5
R-3
R-3
R-3
R-3
ES 300..Center
R-3*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LX 450
K-4** K-4**
NOTE: *The extender must not be used for the center rear seat belt (except ‘97 model ES 300 as noted in
the chart).
**Includes third seat application.
PART NUMBER BY REQUIRED LENGTH (73399–):
SERIES 6 INCH 9 INCH 12 INCH 15 INCH 18 INCH
K-4
33010
33020
33030
33040
33050
N-3
20011
20021
20031
20041
20051
R-3
50010
50020
50030
50040
50050
R-5
16060
16070
16080
16090
16100
SEAT BELT EXTENDER FOR 1993 THROUGH 1997 MODELS
Page 4 of 6
OWNER INSTRUCTION FOR PERSONALIZED SEAT BELT EXTENDER:
CAUTION FOR USE OF SEAT BELT EXTENDERS:
1. Never use the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without it.
2. Remember the seat belt extender provided for you may not be safe when used in a different vehicle, or
for another person or at a seating position different than specified.
3. When the seat belt extender is provided for a rear seat position (with automatic locking retractor), make
sure the retractor is locked when in use.
4. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN A LESS EFFECTIVE SEAT BELT
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN CASE OF A VEHICLE ACCIDENT, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY.
USING THE SEAT BELT EXTENDER:
1. Connect the seat belt extender to the seat belt by inserting the tab into the seat belt buckle so the buckle
release buttons of the seat belt extender and the seat belt are located on the same side as shown in the
illustration. You will hear a click when the tab properly locks into the buckle.
2. MAKE SURE THAT THE CONNECTION IS SECURE AND THE SEAT BELT EXTENDER IS NOT
TWISTED.
3. When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the seat belt extender, not on the
seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and seat belt extender.
4. When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle.
SEAT BELT EXTENDER FOR 1993 THROUGH 1997 MODELS
Page 5 of 6
OWNER’S MANUAL TEXT:
SEAT BELT EXTENDER
If your seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order a seat belt extender of the proper required length. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION:
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
less effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of a vehicle accident, increasing the chance of
personal injury.
D Never use the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without it.
D Remember that the seat belt extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different
vehicle, or for another person and/or at different seating positions than specified.
To connect the seat belt extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the
buckle release buttons of the seat belt extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle–
release button on the seat belt extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and seat belt extender itself.
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
CAUTION:
After inserting the tab, make sure that the connection is secure and the seat belt extender is not
twisted.
Models:
April 4, 1997
Introduction
Production
Change
Information
Warranty
Information
‘97 ES 300
Lexus implemented a production change to eliminate a noise in the ashtray receptacle.
The receptacle now has 2 additional ribs eliminating a buzzing noise between the
ashtray insert and receptacle.
• 1997 ES 300 starting with VIN JT8BF22G#V0008640
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
BD7006
Ashtray Receptacle Assembly
0.2
74110Ć33060
91
57
Applicable Warranty:
3 years or 36,000 miles.
Field-Fix
Procedures
1. Remove the ashtray insert.
2. Install 1 piece of felt to each rib of the
ashtray insert.
Use felt size of 10 x 40 x 0.5 mm to
each rib.
NOTE:
Confirm that the ashtray insert is
fully seated in the receptacle after
the field-fix procedure is completed.
Page 1 of 1
BODY
FRONT ASHTRAY RECEPTACLE BUZZ
NOISE
BO003-97
TSIB
Title:
REF:
BODY
NO:
BO004–96
DATE:
DECEMBER 6, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
Title AIR LEAK NOISE FROM FRONT DOOR GLASS AT LOWER REAR CORNER
Page 1 of 2
To prevent a possible air leak (sometimes described as wind noise) at the lower rear corner of the
front door glass, TMC implemented a production change to the interior door trim panel improving the
seal between the door glass and door weather strip. The revised trim panel applies light additional
pressure on the weather strip effectively eliminating an air leak at the #4 corner.
PRODUCTION EFFECTIVE:
Starting VIN:
JT8BF22G * V0012715
FIELD–FIX METHOD:
D Apply hand pressure at the top rear of the front door weather strip to eliminate any gap (“A”)
between the edge of the glass and weather strip.
D While sitting in the driver seat, close the door. Make certain it is closed completely.
AIR LEAK NOISE FROM DOOR GLASS AT #4 CORNER
Page 2 of 2
FIELD–FIX METHOD (CONT’D):
D Measure the gap between the weather strip (“B”) and the door glass at the lower rear inside corner of the
glass.
D Apply a thickness of foam tape equal to the measured gap plus 1 mm to the door weather strip rubber
plate. Pull the weather strip rearward far enough to expose the plate, then apply foam tape (7 mm x
14 mm) to the rubber plate.
D After foam tape is applied to the rubber plate, push the weather strip back into its fully seated position.
No gaps should exist at edge of glass or inside of glass at weatherstrip.
CAUTION:
Apply only a thickness of foam tape as necessary to eliminate the gap. Using more than the
measured amount will interfere with the normal operation of the weather strip to glass in the
full down position.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
OPCODE
BD6009
DESCRIPTION
Air leak Noise from front door
glass at lower rear corner (#4)
Applicable Warranty Coverage:
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
0.5
68173–33020 (RH)
68174–33010 (LH)
59
57
4 years/50,000 miles Comprehensive Warranty.
Models:
‘97 ES 300
May 30, 1997
Introduction
On some 1997 ES 300 vehicles, a rattle noise from the moon roof sliding rail assembly
may be evident. If the noise exists, it is most apparent driving over highway type dots
with the moon roof open approximately 100 mm.
Two changes were implemented:
• Increased viscosity of the grease at the front shoe pin.
• Stiffened the rubber cushion on the siding rail.
Product
Change
Information
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
VIN
PRODUCTION CHANGE
JT8BF22G * V0003340
Increased Grease Viscosity
JT8BF22G * V0048965
Stiffened Rubber Cushion
NOTE:
Part numbers remain unchanged.
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
BD7008
Moon Roof Panel R&R and
install adhesive back felt tape
and grease (both sides), verify
condition resolved
0.6
63201Ć33050
91
43
Page 1 of 2
BODY
MOON ROOF RATTLE ON 1997 ES 300
BO004-97
TSIB
Title:
MOON ROOF RATTLE ON 1997 ES 300 – BO004-97 (Revised)
Field-Fix
Procedures
May 30, 1997
Verify the concern by either road test or static check (static check is to open moon
roof approximately 100 mm, then tap lightly by hand on front edge of panel).
If a rattle exists, correct this condition by following the field-fix procedures outlined
below:
• Remove the moon roof glass panel by first removing the black plastic covers at the
base of the moon roof glass on both right and left sides.
NOTE:
This must be done from inside the vehicle.
• Remove the (4) attaching torx head screws holding the moon roof glass panel in
place.
• Carefully remove the moon roof glass panel and store it in the trunk while making
repairs.
• Use the electric switch to place the assembly in the TILT UP position.
• clean the light gray rubber stop, with a VOC compliant wax and grease remover
approved for use in your area. (Check local regulations.)
• Place adhesive back felt tape (W: 10 mm,
L:15 mm, T:5 mm) on the rubber stop
(both sides).
• Apply high viscosity grease (P/N
00289-1WG00 or equivalent) to the front
shoe pin.
• Engage the electric switch returning the
assembly to the neutral position.
• Reinstall the moon roof glass panel and
make the appropriate flushness
adjustments before tightening the
attaching screws.
Flush adjustment specifications:
±1.5 mm at front (overflush)
0 + 1.5 mm at rear (overflush)
0 – 1.0 mm at rear (underflush)
• Engage the electric switch moving the moon roof panel rearward approximately 100 mm.
• Check for a rattle by tapping lightly (static check) on the front edge of the moon roof
glass panel.
• Torque the attaching screws according to the repair manual.
• Reinstall the plastic covers.
• Test drive the vehicle to confirm no noise exists.
Page 2 of 2
Models:
’97 ES 300
July 25, 1997
Introduction
Some 1997 ES 300s may exhibit a “popping” noise emitting from the rear of the vehicle,
especially when turning left or right ar low speeds (10 to 20 m.p.h.) or when going over
speed bumps. This noise may be caused by insufficient “V–Brace” weld nut and bolt torque.
Affected
Vehicles
r
1997 ES 300s
Required
Tools &
Materials
r
r
r
3/8” Ratchet with 8” Extension Bar
12 mm Deep Well Socket
Torque Wrench
Warranty
Information
r
r
Slotted Screw Driver
Thread Lock Adhesive (LocktiteR 242).
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
710041
Rear Seat Back Assembly
0.3
64241–33010
62
81
Applicable Warranty:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty
is in effect 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s
in–service date.
Repair
Procedure
1. Remove the rear seat.
NOTE:
Refer to the Repair Manual (Page BO–86)
for seat removal and installation.
2. Remove the 4 set nuts and 2 bolts and
apply thread lock adhesive to the
threads.
3. Torque the set nuts and bolts on the
“V–Brace.”
Torque:
13 ftrlbf (18 Nrm, 185 kgfrcm)
4. Reinstall the rear seat.
5. Confirm the condition has been
repaired by test driving.
Page 1 of 1
BODY
V–BRACE REAR POPPING NOISE
BO005–97
TSIB
Title:
Models:
’97 ES 300
September 5, 1997
Introduction
Production
Change
Information
Warranty
Information
Some ES 300 models may experience the lower dash under cover (below glove
compartment) coming loose and/or falling off. The main engine wire harness routing was
modified to prevent excessive down force on the under cover.
S
1997 ES 300s starting with VINs JT8BF22G*V0039230
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
BD7017
Move engine wire harness under lower dash
0.5
55607–33040
62
99
Applicable Warranty:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty
is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the
vehicle’s in–service date.
Repair
Procedure
NOTE:
Refer to the ES 300 Repair Manual (Page RS–19) in addition to the illustrations
below.
1. Remove the lower dash under cover
(No. 2 Under Cover), front door scuff
plate and glove compartment
assembly (Lower Instrument Panel) as
shown in the repair manual.
NOTE:
DO NOT disconnect yellow SRS
Junction Block.
2. Move the Engine Control Module
(ECM) to the right in order to gain
clearance between the blower unit
junction block and the ECM.
Page 1 of 2
BODY
DASH UNDER COVER LOOSE/FALLING
BO006–97
TSIB
Title:
DASH UNDER COVER LOOSE/FALLING – BO006–97
Repair
Procedure
(Continued)
3. Reposition the engine wire harness by
lifting it up between the ECM and the
blower unit. Position the engine wire
harness on the right side end of the
blower junction block as shown.
4. If necessary, move the ECM back to
it’s original position.
5. Reinstall the glove compartment
assembly, front door scuff plate and
clip the SRS junction connector back
into position on the lower dash under
cover (No. 2 Under Cover). Carefully
reinstall the lower dash cover, taking
care that the rear locating pin and the
right rear locating tab are correctly
positioned.
Page 2 of 2
September 5, 1997
Models:
All ’94 through ’98 models
October 24, 1997
Introduction
Lexus customers who find it necessary to increase the length of their sear belts may
obtain Seat Belt Extenders at no cost through their local Lexus dealer.
S
The extender is available in 6 inch, 9 inch, 12 inch, 15 inch and 18 inch lengths.
S
The extender is available only in black.
S
Owners are informed of the seat belt extender availability through the Lexus Owner’s
Manual included in each vehicle.
The customer (individual requiring the extender) must visit a Lexus dealership to have the
required measurements made and to compete the seat belt extender worksheet. The
worksheet will allow the proper fitting and selection of a seat belt extender for the
customer. The dealership personnel should then determine the applicable part number
and place a Critical Order through the TDN Parts Network.
The dealership service department should compete the affixed Seat Belt Extender Label
and review the “owner instruction sheet” with the customer. The dealership should give
a copy of the completed worksheet to the customer and keep the original in the
customer’s file.
To assure utmost owner satisfaction, it is recommended that a dealership designate one
person to coordinate all activities related to the seat belt extender issue.
From past sales history, it is recommended that dealerships do not stock Seat belt
extenders due to low demand and the need for customer fitting.
This bulletin contains the following information:
Procedure and Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Chart and Notes . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Number Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Extender Worksheet . . . . . . . . . .
Affected
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
S
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
2
3
3
4
5
All Lexus models, 1994 through 1998 model years.
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
N/A
Not applicable to warranty
–
–
T1
T2
–
–
Page 1 of 5
BODY
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
BO007–97
TSIB
Title:
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO007–97
Procedure
October 24, 1997
1. Owner requests a seat belt extender from dealer.
2. Dealer verifies the need for a seat belt extender and obtains a current copy of this
TSB and copies the worksheet.
3. Dealer measures the customer and completes the worksheet. Dealer determines
the correct part number and places a Critical Order for the part through the TDN
Parts Network.
4. Dealer receives seat belt extender and calls the customer in to check fit of the part.
5. If the seat belt extender fit is good, dealership personnel completes the customer
information label on the part, explains usage of the part, and gives the customer a
copy of the completed worksheet.
6. Dealer places a copy of the completed worksheet in the customer’s records.
Page 2 of 5
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO007–97
Front Seat
Belt Extender
Applications
Rear Seat
Belt Extender
Applications
October 24, 1997
FRONT SEAT - EXTENDER APPLICATION
MODEL
'98
'97
'96
'95
'94
LS 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
GS 400
R–5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
GS 300
R–5
N–3
N–3
N–3
N–3
SC 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
SC 300
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300
R–5
R–5
K–4
K–4
K–4
LX 450
N/A
R–3
R–3
N/A
N/A
REAR SEAT - EXTENDER APPLICATION
MODEL
'98
'97
'96
'95
'94
LS 400
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
K–4
K–4
K–4
K–4
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300 (Right & Left)
R–5
R–5
R–3
R–3
R–3
ES 300 (Center)
R–3
R–3*
N/A
N/A
N/A
LX 450
N/A
K–4**
K–4**
N/A
N/A
GS 400
GS 300
K–5
SC 400
SC 300
NOTE:
* The extender must NOT be used for the center rear seat belt (except on ’97
and ’98 model ES 300s as noted in the chart).
** Includes third seat application.
Parts
Information
PART NUMBER PREFIX: 733996 INCH
9 INCH
LENGTH
12 INCH
15 INCH
18 INCH
K–4
–33010
–33020
–33030
–33040
–33050
K–5
–35010
–35020
–35030
–35040
–35050
N–3
–20011
–20021
–20031
–20041
–20051
R–3
–50010
–50020
–50030
–50040
–50050
R–5
–16060
–16070
–16080
–16090
–16100
SERIES
Page 3 of 5
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS: 1994–1998 – BO007–97
Owner
Instructions
October 24, 1997
Failure to follow the recommendations indicated below could result in less
effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle collision, causing
personal injury.
The seat belt extender must not be used:
a. By anyone other than for whom it was provided (name recorded on seat belt
extender).
b. In any vehicle and/or seat position other than the one for which it was provided.
c. When the seat belt extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic
locking retractor), make sure the retractor is locked when is use.
If your seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough, a
personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper
required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper
measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION:
When using the seat belt extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in less effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in
case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.
S
Never use the seat belt extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt
without it.
S
Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on
a different vehicle, or for another person or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended for.
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle–release buttons of the
extender and the seat belt are both
facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle–release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt. This helps
prevent damage to the vehicle interior
and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
Page 4 of 5
REF:
ENGINE
NO:
EG002–96
DATE:
APRIL 19, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
Title EXHAUST PIPE PROTECTOR AND CLAMP
Page 1 of 1
For ES 300s with 1MZ–FE engines, exhaust pipe protectors and clamps are now available as separate
supply parts. Part numbers and installation instructions for these parts are provided below.
PART NUMBER INFORMATION:
NUMBER
PART NAME
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
1
Protector, Exhaust Pipe, Upper No. 2
17522–20010
1
2
Protector, Exhaust Pipe, Upper No. 3
17523–20010
1
3
Protector, Exhaust Pipe, Upper No. 4
17524–62020
1
4
Protector, Exhaust Pipe, Lower No. 2
17594–20010
1
5
Protector, Exhaust Pipe, Lower No. 3
17595–20010
1
6
Protector, Exhaust Pipe, Lower No. 4
17596–62020
1
7
Clamp
90461–12350
1
8
Clamp
90461–12385
1
9
Clamp
90461–12353
1
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:
Install protector so there is no noticeable gap or interference between exhaust pipe and
protector.
Torque: 100 kgf-cm (7ft-lbs)
REF:
ENGINE
NO:
EG004–96
DATE:
OCTOBER 11, 1996
MODEL: ALL MODELS
Title UNDERCOATING ON OXYGEN SENSORS
Page 1 of 1
During vehicle processing by Dealers, care must be taken to avoid applying undercoating in the area surrounding the Oxygen Sensors. Application of undercoating on or near the Oxygen Sensors can cause
insufficient air to flow around the sensor, and inaccurate information storage by the ECM. If this condition
occurs, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may illuminate.
EG005–97
TAIL PIPE CONTACT WITH HEAT SHIELD
Models:
’97 ES 300
May 16, 1997
Introduction
To prevent contact between the tail pipe and heat shield when turning quickly and/or
going over bumps, the Exhaust Pipe Support No. 4 has been changed to prevent
excessive movement of the tail pipe assembly.
Fig. 1
Affected
Vehicles
Parts
Information
S
1997 Model Year ES 300 produced before VIN JT8BF22G#V0021520.
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
17565–20050
17565–11160
Support, Exhaust. Pipe No. 4
Fig. 2
Warranty
Information
Fig. 3
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
170281
Exhaust pipe support bracket (for tailpipe)
0.4
17565–20050
91
57
Page 1 of 2
ENGINE
TSIB
Title:
TAIL PIPE CONTACT WITH HEAT SHIELD – EG005–97
Repair
Procedure
May 16, 1997
1. Remove original exhaust pipe support
No. 4 then loosen nuts (as indicated
by red arrows in figure 4) to turn the
flange of the tail pipe.
Fig. 4
2. Reposition muffler assembly by pulling
down tail pipe assembly (as shown by
large arrow in figure 5). While holding
tail pipe down, retighten nuts as
indicated by two red arrows.
Torque: 41 ftSlbs (56 NSm, 570 KgfScm)
Fig. 5
3. Loosen nuts attaching center exhaust
pipe to front exhaust pipe (indicated by
red arrows in figure 6). Reposition
center pipe by turning counterclockwise
as shown. While holding pipe in position,
retighten nuts.
Torque: 41 ftSlbs (56 NSm, 570 KgfScm)
Fig. 6
4. Install new exhaust pipe support No. 4,
(P/N 17565–11160).
5. Confirm that clearance between tail
pipe and heat shield (A – A’ & B – B’) is
within specification.
A – A’ . . . . . . . . 15
(0.6
B – B’ . . . . . . . . 20
(0.8
– 27 mm
– 1.1 in.)
– 30 mm
– 1.2 in.)
Fig. 7
NOTE:
If clearance is not within specification repeat steps 1 through 4 as required.
Page 2 of 2
Models:
’96 – ’97 ES 300
May 30, 1997
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Parts
Information
Repair
Procedure
To eliminate “humming” noise from the charcoal canister at idle or low engine speeds, a
revised vacuum hose is now available as a replacement part.
S
All 1996 & 1997 Model Year ES 300s.
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
NEW PART NUMBER
PART NAME
N/A*
25760–20010
Hose Assembly, Vacuum Transmitting
1. Remove original hose and discard.
2. Install new hose, connecting the end
with white paint dot to the diaphragm
port as shown.
* NOTE
Original hose is not listed as a
replacement part but as part of the
Charcoal Canister Assembly.
Warranty
Information
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
EG7002
Hose Assembly, Vacuum Transmitting
0.5
25760–20010
91
99
Page 1 of 1
ENGINE
CHARCOAL CANISTER HUMMING NOISE
EG006–97
TSIB
Title:
Models:
’97 ES 300
June 20, 1997
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Warranty
Information
Repair
Procedure
The electrical connectors for the seat heater are identical in shape and may be
inadvertantly cross–connected. Should a customer state that the seat heaters do not
operate, it is possible that the control switches are connected improperly. This may be
caused by the connection of the right–side heater switch to the left seat and connection
of the left side switch to the right seat. If neither seat heater operates, follow the
diagnostic procedures listed in the service manual.
S
A new assembly check procedure was adopted starting with
VIN JT8BF22G*V0023701 to avoid the possible occurrence of this condition.
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
BD6011
Reverse seat heater switch connectors
0.3
84751-33030
72
57
1. Lift up the console panel from the
back side using a screwdriver.
NOTE:
Take care not to damage the panel.
Place tape over the screwdriver tip
before attempting this procedure.
2. Inspect the seat heater switch
connectors:
S
The BLACK seat heater switch
connector should be installed in the
DRIVER’S side switch.
S
The BLUE seat heater switch
connector should be installed in the
PASSENGER’S side switch.
3. Reverse position of connectors as
necessary.
4. Reinstall the console panel.
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
SEAT HEATERS INOPERATIVE
EL001–97
TSIB
Title:
REF:
ELECTRICAL
NO:
EL002–96
DATE:
MARCH 29, 1996
MODEL: ALL MODELS
Title BATTERY MAINTENANCE FOR IN–STOCK VEHICLES
Page 1 of 4
A battery in a stored vehicle is subject to conditions which can reduce its performance and life. These
conditions include storage period, temperature, parasitic drain, and battery load. Because of these
factors, battery inspection and maintenance are required in order to ensure proper operation and optimal
battery life.
As a matter of policy, Lexus does not provide battery warranty coverage for discharged and/or failed
batteries due to lack of maintenance; it is the dealer’s responsibility to maintain the specified state of
charge of the vehicle’s battery while in stock.
BATTERY MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS:
1. A monthly battery inspection is required under normal conditions. If your dealership is located in
an area subject to extreme temperatures (hot or cold), periodic maintenance may need to be
performed on a more frequent basis. When maintenance requires removal of filler plugs on
vehicles with “maintenance free” batteries, new labels are available via the following part numbers:
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
APPLICABLE BATTERY SIZE
28898–50130
2
80D26L
28898–50140
2
75D31L and
95D31L
BATTERY MAINTENANCE FOR IN–STOCK VEHICLES
Page 2 of 4
BATTERY MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS (Cont’d):
2. To reduce battery drain during storage of in–stock vehicles, the dome light fuse of each vehicle should
be removed. It is recommended that the fuse remain disconnected until time of delivery. This
procedure can reduce battery discharge 60–80 percent. Additionally, for vehicles in storage for 30
days or more, the negative battery cable should always be disconnected to further reduce
battery discharge.
NOTE 1: For your reference, the electrical systems made inoperative by removing the dome light fuse, are
indicated in the appropriate Electrical Wiring Diagram.
NOTE 2: Additional battery maintenance information is available in the Lexus Warranty Reference And
Administration Procedures Manual (Policy # 4.10 pages 1–4).
Two test procedures are currently available for evaluating battery performance. These include:
1. Open–Circuit Voltage Test Procedure
2. Specific Gravity Test Procedure
OPEN–CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST PROCEDURE:
1. If the battery has recently been charged or if the engine has been run in the last hour, there will be a
surface charge on the battery. To remove the surface charge, turn on the headlights for two minutes.
NOTE: Turn off headlights before proceeding with test.
2. With the key out of the ignition, all doors closed, and all electrical accessories off, connect the voltmeter
across the battery terminals.
3. Read the voltmeter.
Compare measured voltage to open circuit
voltage chart:
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE (OCV) CHART
RESULTS
OK
NG
OPEN CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE
% STATE
OF
CHARGE
EQUIVALENT
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
12.65 Volts
100%
1.265 @ 80_F
12.40 Volts
75%
1.225 @ 80_F
Less Than
12.40 Volts
<
50%
=
1.190 @
80_F
BATTERY MAINTENANCE FOR IN–STOCK VEHICLES
Page 3 of 4
TEST RESULTS:
1. A fully charged battery will have an open–circuit voltage of at least 12.6 volts.
2. The minimum acceptable voltage is 12.4 volts. If the reading is less than 12.4 volts, charging is
necessary. Use the slow charging procedure described below.
CHARGING PROCEDURE:
1. If the test results indicate a charge is necessary, a slow–constant 10–amp or less charge rate is
recommended until the battery reaches a full state of charge. Be sure to periodically check and
maintain the proper electrolyte levels during charging.
CAUTION:
Insure that the charger is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the leads. Always
connect the negative lead last. When disconnecting, always disconnect the negative lead first.
NOTE:
For additional information on battery inspection and testing procedures, see “Battery/Starter
Circuit Inspection And Testing Procedures” in the “Technicians Handbook For Electrical Circuits
And Diagnosis Course” (MDC # 00246–42917).
SPECIFIC GRAVITY TEST PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the vent caps or plugs from the battery cells.
2. Take the specific gravity readings with a temperature corrected hydrometer. Follow the procedure
described by the manufacturer of your hydrometer.
3. Record the specific gravity of each cell.
BATTERY MAINTENANCE FOR IN–STOCK VEHICLES
Page 4 of 4
TEST RESULTS:
1. A fully charged battery will have a specific gravity reading of approximately 1.265 at 80_F.
2. The minimum standard for this test is a specific gravity reading of 1.190. If the reading is less than
1.190, charging is necessary. Use the slow charging procedure described in this TSIB.
3. A difference of 0.050 or more between highest and lowest cell readings indicates a problem battery.
Should you encounter this situation, attempt one recharge using the slow charging procedure described
in this TSIB. Allow the battery to stabilize at least 20 minutes after the charge cycle is complete.
Recheck the specific gravity of each cell. If the deviation in cell readings still exceeds 0.050, the battery
must be replaced.
4. After battery service is complete, reinstall the battery caps/plugs and replace the plug labels as
applicable.
REF:
ELECTRICAL
NO:
EL003–96
DATE:
AUGUST 9, 1996
MODEL: LS 400, GS 300,
SC 300, SC 400,
ES 300
Title WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 1 of 13
The following information applies to all 1996 and previous models, except the LX 450, and to both
transmitter types shown below:
FEATURES AND LIMITATIONS:
The following features and limitations of Lexus wireless door lock control systems must be thoroughly
understood before proceeding with diagnosis.
In the following information, the word “transmitter” is used to describe the signal generating device that
is an integral part of the key or fob and “receiver” is used to describe the wireless door lock ECU.
TRANSMITTER CHARACTERISTICS AND RANGE:
1. Weak radio frequency (RF) waves are used by the transmitter to operate the wireless door lock
control system. Strong radio waves or RF noise from other sources may shorten the operating
distance or prevent operation.
2. When the transmitter battery is weak, operation may be normal for the first one or two
activations and then stop as the remaining battery capacity is depleted.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 2 of 13
TRANSMITTER CHARACTERISTICS AND RANGE (Cont’d):
3. On key type transmitters, the metal portion of the key serves as an antenna during transmitter operation.
For optimum performance, the path between the metal portion of the key and the vehicle should not be
obstructed by the operator’s hand or other objects.
4. On key type transmitters, the operating distance of the transmitter varies from front to back and side to
side as shown below.
NOTE: Diagram represents only a generalized view which may vary depending on the model and
operating conditions. Fob type transmitters accommodate a larger transmitter and battery which
typically provide increased operating range.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 3 of 13
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS:
1. Transmitter Auto Power Off Function *:
Transmitting stops automatically after continually pressing the transmitter button for a fixed amount of
time.
D
Key type transmitter *:
0.8 – 1.2 seconds
D
Fob type transmitter:
approximately 10 seconds
*
This power saving feature was added to key type transmitters after the following VINs:
PRODUCTION EFFECTIVE:
MODEL
VIN
SC 300
JT8JZ31C**0017065
SC 400
JT8UZ30C**0035393
GS 300
JT8JS47E**0021034
LS 400
JT8UF11E**0145224
ES 300
JT8GK13T**0001033
2. Auto Lock Function:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the transmitter, the doors will automatically relock if no door is opened
within 30 seconds.
3. Chatter Prevention Function:
When the receiver picks up the correct specified code the first time, it rejects subsequent code signals.
It stops reception until transmission is suspended for 0.5 seconds or longer to prevent door lock
chattering.
4. Transmitter Switch Misoperation Prevention Function:
When the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder, the receiver will suspend signal reception.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 4 of 13
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS:
IMPORTANT: All wireless diagnosis must start at this point and proceed as directed. Diagnostic
information from this point forward assumes that all preceding steps have been properly
performed. If steps are performed improperly or started beyond this point, an erroneous
diagnosis may be obtained.
Start here by performing the following power door lock control and theft deterrent system checks:
1. Verify that both interior power door lock control switches will lock and unlock all doors.
2. Verify that driver and passenger door key locks will lock and unlock* all doors.
3. Verify that the theft deterrent system will arm when all doors are closed and locked.
*
Driver’s door key lock must be cycled twice to unlock all doors.
If any of the above items do not operate normally, refer to either the (Power) Door Lock Control System or Theft
Deterrent System section of the repair manual for diagnosis. The wireless feature is an enhancement to the
power door lock control system and is dependent on proper operation of the power door lock control and theft
deterrent systems.
Choose the applicable problem area from the chart shown below and refer to the listed procedure for diagnosis.
Matrix Chart Of Problem Symptoms:
PROBLEM
PROCEDURE
PAGE NUMBER
Wireless inoperative at all times
A
5
Wireless intermittently inoperative
B
7
Wireless has reduced operating distance
B
7
Wireless inoperative at specific locations
C
8
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 5 of 13
PROCEDURE A – WIRELESS INOPERATIVE AT ALL TIMES:
1. Check battery capacity (See Page 9 – Battery Capacity Check Procedure).
2. Set FM radio to 94.9 MHz* and press the transmitter button while holding transmitter near radio
antenna. If noise interference cannot be heard on the radio when the transmitter is depressed, the
transmitter is faulty. This test is only used to identify a faulty transmitter, a positive result does not
guarantee transmitter integrity or sufficient battery capacity.
*
This test cannot be performed on and does not apply to vehicles equipped with a fob type
transmitter which uses a frequency that does not have a multiple in the FM frequency range.
REMINDER: Transmitters equipped with the Auto Power Off Function quit transmitting
0.8 – 1.2 seconds after depressing the transmitter button (see Page 3).
3. Enter diagnostic mode:
a. Open driver’s door.
b. Lock all doors using the interior power door lock switch.
c. Insert key in ignition once and remove.
d. Cycle the door locks (unlock and lock = 1 cycle) using the interior power door lock switch
10 times as shown below (if door locks are cycled too slow or too fast, diagnostic mode will
not be initiated).
4. Door locks should cycle (unlock/lock) one time automatically to confirm that diagnostic mode has
been entered. If door locks do not cycle, repeat Step 3.
NOTE:
If attempts to enter the diagnostic mode fail repeatedly, faulty vehicle harness wiring or a
faulty receiver may be the cause. Refer to Matrix Chart of Problem Symptoms in the Wireless
Door Lock Control System section of the repair manual for diagnosis.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 6 of 13
PROCEDURE A – WIRELESS INOPERATIVE AT ALL TIMES (Cont’d):
5. Within 10 seconds of entering diagnostic mode, press the transmitter button once and count the
number of door lock (unlock/lock) cycles. Refer to the applicable chart below:
Non–Programmable Type (Pre–1995):
DOOR LOCK
CYCLES
DIAGNOSIS
REPAIR PROCEDURE
0
Wireless antenna, receiver
or vehicle wiring harness
problem
First perform antenna check (Page 12).
If antenna is OK, refer to “Wireless Door
Lock Control System” section of Repair
Manual for diagnosis.
1
Mismatched key and ROM
Replace key and ROM.
2
Faulty transmitter
Replace transmitter.
Programmable Key Type (1995 and later):
DOOR LOCK
CYCLES
DIAGNOSIS
REPAIR PROCEDURE
0
Wireless antenna, receiver
or vehicle wiring harness
problem
First perform antenna check (Page 12).
If antenna is OK, refer to “Wireless Door
Lock Control System” section of Repair
Manual for diagnosis.
1
Normal
None
2
Transmitter not registered
Key Registration (see Page 11)
Programmable Fob Type (1995 and later):
DOOR LOCK
CYCLES
DIAGNOSIS
REPAIR PROCEDURE
0
Faulty transmitter or receiver
Continue with procedure below
1
Transmitter not registered
Key Registration (see Page 11)
Repeat diagnostic mode initiation procedure (Steps 3 through 5) with a known good tranmitter. Do NOT
register the transmitter first. Count the number of door lock cycles (unlock/lock) and refer to the table below:
DOOR LOCK
CYCLES
DIAGNOSIS
REPAIR PROCEDURE
0
Faulty reciever
Replace
1
Original transmitter faulty
Replace original transmitter
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 7 of 13
PROCEDURE B – WIRELESS IS INTERMITTENTLY INOPERATIVE OR HAS REDUCED
OPERATING DISTANCE:
1. Review the Transmitter Characteristics and Range section on Pages 1 and 2.
2. Check battery capacity (see Page 9 – Battery Capacity Check Procedure).
3. Inspect wireless antenna* (see Page 12 – Wireless Antenna Inspection Procedure).
*
This step only applies to key type transmitters (see illustration below). Fob type transmitter systems use
an internal antenna in the receiver (1995 and later LS 400 and 1996 and later SC 300/400).
4. If a complaint of intermittent operation can be verified, the transmitter is faulty.
5. If a complaint of intermittent operation cannot be verified, check for intermittent sticking of the unlock
warning switch using the following method:
a.
Insert key in ignition.
b.
Turn ignition switch from lock to accessory and back to lock.
c.
Remove key.
d.
Check remote lock/unlock operation.
e.
Repeat steps “a” – “d” at least 10 times.
If remote becomes inoperative during step “d”, unlock detection switch or ignition key cylinder is faulty.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 8 of 13
PROCEDURE C – WIRELESS INOPERATIVE AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS:
This procedure is used to check for the presence of electrical interference at specific locations that may interfere
with wireless transmitter/receiver operation. This test is used only to verify the presence of electrical
interference at a specific location and does not lead to a repair.
IMPORTANT: Verify that the wireless door lock control system operation is normal in non–compliant
areas. If the system is inoperative at all locations, do not continue with this procedure, refer
to Procedure A – Wireless Inoperative At All Times.
Perform the following procedure in the area where the problem is occurring:
1. Enter the diagnostic mode:
a. Open the driver’s door.
b. Lock all doors using the interior power door lock switch.
c. Insert key in ignition once and remove.
d. Cycle the door locks (unlock and lock = 1 cycle) using the interior power door lock switch 10
times as shown below (if door locks are cycled too slow or too fast, diagnostic mode will not be
initiated).
2. Door locks should cycle (unlock/lock) one time automatically to confirm that diagnostic mode has
been entered. If door locks do not cycle, repeat Step 1.
3. Within the next 10 seconds, count the number of door lock (unlock/lock) cycles and refer to the chart
below:
DOOR LOCK CYCLES
DIAGNOSIS
0
No interference at this time
1 or 2
Outside electrical interference
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 9 of 13
BATTERY CAPACITY CHECK PROCEDURE:
The lithium battery used in the transmitter will measure a voltage of 2.5 volts or more until the battery capacity
is fully consumed. To accurately determine the remaining battery capacity, a load must be applied.
NOTE: Make all battery checks at room temperature (low temperatures may adversely affect
output).
1. Key Type Transmitters:
Remove screw, pry cover up slightly, and push cover away from portion of the key.
Fob Type Transmitters:
Insert a screwdriver and twist to remove cover.
2. Inspect the battery terminals, transmitter case, and cover for corrosion or visible damage. Replace
transmitter if necessary.
3. Depress the transmitter button for 1 second and then release for 1 second. Repeat this process 5
times.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 10 of 13
BATTERY CAPACITY CHECK PROCEDURE (Cont’d):
4. Connect the positive (+) lead from the tester to the transmitter battery (+) and the negative (–) lead as
shown.
5. Depress the transmitter button again and measure the voltage. Verify that the voltage drops when the
transmitter button is depressed (no voltage drop may indicate a faulty transmitter). Transmitters
equipped with the Auto Power Off Function (see Page 3) will only load the battery for 0.8 – 1.2 seconds
after the transmitter button is depressed (voltage must be checked during this time). If loaded battery
voltage is below 2.1 volts, replace the battery.
BATTERY INFORMATION:
TRANSMITTER TYPE
BATTERY PART NUMBER
BATTERY TYPE
Key
89706–50010
BR 1216
Fob
89745–50010
CR 2016
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 11 of 13
KEY REGISTRATION (1995 AND LATER MODELS):
Set initial conditions:
D
Key out of ignition
D
Driver’s door open and unlocked
D
All other doors closed and locked
Registration Procedure:
NOTE: Perform all steps with no more than a five second interval between steps.
1. Insert key into ignition for 1 second and remove.
2. Cycle (lock and unlock = 1 cycle) the driver’s interior power door lock switch 5 times
(1 second in each position).
3. Close and reopen driver’s door.
4. Cycle the driver’s interior power door lock switch 5 times (1 second in each position).
5. Insert key into ignition and cycle the ignition on and off:
D
One time to add a new code.
D
Two times to add a new code and erase all previously stored codes.
D
Three times to check how many codes are currently registered.
6. Remove key from ignition. Receiver should respond by cycling the door locks a corresponding
number of times:
D
One time to add a new code.
D
Two times to add a new code and erase all previously stored codes.
D
One to four times (slowly) to indicate how many codes are registered (end).
NOTE:
If no response is given, start over at the beginning of this procedure.
7. Press the transmitter button (any button on fob type transmitters) for 1 second.
NOTE:
Receiver should respond by cycling door locks once. If no response is given, start over at the
beginning of this procedure.
8. Close and reopen driver’s door.
9. Press the transmitter button for 1 second. Receiver should respond by cycling door locks:
D
One time to confirm operation is complete.
D
Two times to signal that the code is already registered.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 12 of 13
WIRELESS ANTENNA INSPECTION PROCEDURE:
If wireless operation is verifiably inoperative, use Procedure A, otherwise use Procedure B.
Procedure A:
Remove antenna cable from receiver. Insert key into receiver antenna port as shown below. Press transmitter
button several times while monitoring door lock operation.
If door locks are still inoperative, the antenna circuit is not the primary problem.
If door lock operation is consistent:
1. Inspect rear glass for damaged or broken wires and replace glass if necessary.
2. If rear glass is OK, replace wireless antenna cable.
Procedure B:
Perform the following checks:
1. Inspect rear glass for damaged or broken wires and replace glass if necessary.
2. Inspect antenna cable connections at rear glass and at receiver.
3. Physically inspect antenna cable for pinches or breaks and replace cable if necessary.
4. Check continuity through inner coaxial cable wire and replace cable if necessary.
WIRELESS DOOR LOCK SERVICE INFORMATION AND DIAGNOSIS
Page 13 of 13
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
891101
Transmitter replacement includes
key registration or installation of
the ROM in the ECU where
applicable and all necessary
checks and tests
0.3
897XX–50XXX
95
71
EL6002
For VCV10
Transmitter replacement includes
the ROM in the ECU where
applicable and all necessary
checks and tests
0.2
897XX–50XXX
95
71
EL6003
Receiver replacement including all
necessary checks and tests
0.3
5974X–50XXX
95
71
830651
Ignition key cylinder R&R including
all necessary checks and tests
*
84450–XXXXX
72
71
*
69052–XXXXX
95
71
672101
Door key (unlock/lock) switch R&R
including all necessary checks and
tests
NOTE: Replacement of the transmitter battery is not warrantable as per the Lexus Warranty Policy &
Procedures Manual.
*
Refer to the specific model in the Lexus Flat Rate Manual for repair time.
Models:
March 7, 1997
Introduction
All Models
The following is a listing of 1997 Lexus paint codes and corresponding refinish formula
codes for 8 (eight) refinish paint companies –– BASF, DuPont, PPG, Sherwin Williams,
Sikkens, Spies Hecker, ICI and Standox* (Paint and refinish formula codes are located
on page 2).
*
Standox uses the Lexus color code number as their paint code identification number.
Example: The Standox paint code number for Lexus color code 202 (Black Onyx) is
202.
NOTE:
The body color code is indicated on the Certification Label which is located in
the driver’s door area as shown below.
Please contact your local paint representative for the actual paint mixing
formulas or for additional assistance in color matching.
Please provide a copy of this information to your Lexus Collision Repair Center.
Page 1 of 4
PAINT
1997 PAINT AND REFINISH FORMULA
CODES
PA001–97
TSIB
Title:
1997 PAINT AND REFINISH FORMULA CODES – PA001–97
Paint Codes &
Color Names
Page 2 of 4
COLOR
COLOR NAME
BASF
DUPONT
PPG
CODE
March 7, 1997
SHERWIN
SIKKENS
WILLIAMS
045
Super White
TOY045 H8931
90547
051
Diamond White Pearl
TOY051 L9246
L9247
90822
90826
1A0
Platinum Metallic
TOY1A0 N9923
4896
199
Alpine Silver Metallic
TOY199
L9990
1B1
Champagne Pearl
TOY1B1
1B2
Antique Sage Pearl
202
Black Onyx
3K7
Shadow Rose Quartz
3L2
38712
SPIES-
ICI
HECKER
TOY045
16004
NP65
TOY051
98125
16329
PF76B
TD86G
49700
TOY1A0
70809 6ED5B
4900
48976
TOY199
70706 5TX1B
F2186
5252
53074
TOY1B1
20699 FLT9B
TOY1B2
F2201
5324
54757
TOY1B2
73622 HRE5B
TOY202
F0220
9300
1738SW
8803MS
TOY202
73935 TH21B
TOY3K7 H9650
4615
46620
TOY3K7
99745 PM71B
Renaissance Red
TOY3L2
L9992
4902
48978
TOY3L2
30491 5TX3B
3L3
Ruby Red Pearl
TOY3L3
F0294
5042
51162
TOY3L3
30914 6KD3B
3L4
Bordeaux Pearl
TOY3L4
F1803
5164
52886
TOY3L4
33135 ARD1B
4M7
Oyster Pearl
TOY4M7 K9968
27579
48841
TOY4M7
10655 5MK6B
4M9 Cashmere Beige Metallic TOY4M9 N9924
4903
49702
TOY4M9
20261 6ED6B
4N1 Crystal Quartz Metallic TOY4N1 F1052
5057
51185
TOY4N1
80373 7VS8B
6M1 Dark Emerald Green Prl. TOY6M1 W9542
4595
46589
TOY6M1
99746 PM72B
6N0
Moonstone Pearl
TOY6N0 F1053
5049
51187
TOY6N0
61495 7VT1B
6N9
Ebony Teal Pearl
TOY6N9 F1054
5050
51189
TOY6N9
61496 7VT2B
6P2
Classic Green Pearl
TOY6P2
F1850
5173
52889
TOY6P2
61953 BAA7B
6P3 Deep Jewel Green Pearl TOY6P3
F1805
5166
52887
TOY6P3
61928 ARD3B
6P7
Silver Jade Metallic
TOY6P7
F2719
5332
54755
TOY6P7
64197 HRE3B
8L1
Star Sapphire Pearl
TOY8L1
F1055
5052
51191
TOY8L1
53765 7VT3B
8L3
Blue Velvet Pearl
TOY8L3
F2239
5328
54032
TOY8L3
54676 FRC7B
8L5
Royal Sapphire Pearl
TOY8L5
F2728
5329
54485
TOY8L5
55068 HDJ4B
42872
42873
1997 PAINT AND REFINISH FORMULA CODES – PA001–97
Paint
Applications
& Types
COLOR CODE
LS 400
SC 400
SC 300
March 7, 1997
GS 300
ES 300
LX 450
045
051
1A0
199
1B1
1B2
NEW
202
3K7
3L2
3L3
NEW
NEW
3L4
4M7
4M9
NEW
4N1
6M1
6N0
6N9
6P2
6P3
6P7
NEW
NEW
8L1
8L3
8L5
Paint Film
Cross
Sections
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
PAINT TYPE #1
PAINT TYPE #2
Solid Color – Non Clear Coat
Metallic or Mica Color – Clear Coat
Codes: 202 (Except LX 450)
Codes: 1A0, 199, 3K7, 3L3, 3L4
4M7, 4M9 (Except LX 450),
4N1, 6N0, 6P2, 6P3, 6P7, 8L1,
8L3, 8L5
Page 3 of 4
1997 PAINT AND REFINISH FORMULA CODES – PA001–97
Paint Film
Cross
Sections
(Continued)
PAINT TYPE #3
PAINT TYPE #4
MIO Color – Two Clear Coats
Pearl Mica Color – One Clear Coat
Codes: 6N9
Codes: 051
PAINT TYPE #5
PAINT TYPE #6
Solid Color – Tinted Clear Coat
Solid Color – Non Clear Coat
Codes: 3L2
Codes: 045, 202 (LX 450 only)
PAINT TYPE #7
Metallic or Mica Color – Clear Coat
Codes: 1B1, 1B2, 4M9 (LX 450 only),
6M1
Page 4 of 4
March 7, 1997
REF:
PAINT
NO:
PA003–96
DATE:
DECEMBER 4, 1996
MODEL: ALL MODELS
Title 1997 MODEL YEAR PAINT COLORS
Page 1 of 3
The following information outlines the single and two–tone painting schemes used on 1997 model
year Lexus models.
PAINTING METHOD:
Single Color – The cladding and bumpers are painted with the same color.
Two–Tone Color –
The claddings and bumpers are painted with a different color from the
body color to achieve a two–tone painting scheme.
LS 400 TWO–TONE COLORS:
BODY COLOR
CLADDING COLOR
SINGLE/TWO–TONE NAME
051
UCA29
Diamond White Pearl/Warm Silver Metallic
199
UCA75
Alpine Silver Metallic/Gray Silver Metallic
202
UCA31
Black Onyx/Dark Gray Metallic
4M9
UCA77
Cashmere Beige Metallic/Beige Metallic
4N1
UCA78
Crystal Quartz Metallic/Dark Taupe Metallic
6N0
UCA76
Moonstone Pearl/Medium Gray Metallic
6N9
UCA31
Ebony Teal Pearl/Dark Gray Metallic
6P3
6N0
Deep Jewel Green Pearl/Moonstone Pearl
6P7
UCAA5
Silver Jade Pearl/Greenish Gray Pearl
8L1
UCA32
Star Sapphire Pearl/Dark Bluish Gray Metallic
1997 MODEL YEAR PAINT COLORS
Page 2 of 3
GS 300 SINGLE AND TWO–TONE COLORS:
BODY COLOR
CLADDING COLOR
SINGLE/TWO–TONE NAME
051
UCA29
Diamond White Pearl/Warm Silver Metallic
199
199
Alpine Silver Metallic (One Color)
202
202
Black Onyx (One Color)
3L3
3L3
Ruby Pearl (One Color)
4M9
4M9
Cashmere Beige Metallic (One Color)
6N0
6N0
Moonstone Pearl (One Color)
6N9
UCA93
Ebony Teal Pearl/Warm Gray Mica Metallic
8L1
8L1
Star Sapphire Pearl (One Color)
ES 300 TWO–TONE COLORS:
BODY
COLOR
CLADDING
COLOR
TWO–TONE NAME
051
UCA46
Diamond White Pearl/Light Grayish Beige Metallic
1B2
UCAA3
Antique Sage Pearl/Medium Green Gray Metallic
202
UCA45
Black Onyx/Bluish Gray Metallic
3L3
3K2
Ruby Pearl/Dark Red
4M7
UCAA2
Oyster Pearl/Light Brown Gray Metallic
4M9
UCA46
Cashmere Beige Metallic/Light Grayish Beige Metallic
6P2
UCA45
Classic Green Pearl/Bluish Gray Metallic
8L3
UCA45
Blue Velvet Pearl/Bluish Gray Metallic
ES 300 SPECIAL EDITION COLORS:
BODY
COLOR
CLADDING
COLOR
TWO–TONE NAME
046
UC178
Opal White Pearl/Light Rose Silver Metallic
176
UC196
Silvermist Metallic/Pewter Pearl
202
UC138
Black Onyx/Dark Gray Metallic
1997 MODEL YEAR PAINT COLORS
Page 3 of 3
LX 450 TWO–TONE COLORS:
BODY
COLOR
CLADDING
COLOR
TWO–TONE NAME
045
UCA46
Super White/Light Grayish Beige Metallic
1B1
UCA46
Champagne Pearl/Light Grayish Beige Metallic
202
UCA31
Black Onyx/Dark Gray Metallic
4M9
UCA46
Cashmere Beige Metallic/Light Grayish Beige Metallic
6M1
UCA31
Dark Emerald Pearl/Dark Gray Metallic
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Since heat deformation of the cladding occurs more easily than bumpers, repair and refinishing of these
parts is not recommended. If original parts are to be refinished, observe the following precautions during
the refinish/drying process:
1.
To prevent cladding warpage, firmly hold the cladding in place and keep drying temperature below
50_C (122_F).
2.
Since the cladding and bumpers are made of a flexible plastic urethane material, use a
2–part urethane finish paint system with plasticizer for all bumper/cladding repairs.
Models:
February 28, 1997
Introduction
‘95 - ‘97 LS 400, ‘97 GS 300, ‘97 ES 300,
‘97 LX 450
Corrections have been made in the repair manuals listed below. A brief Description
of each correction is provided. For further details, refer to the appropriate Correction
Page (attached to this TSIB for Dealer Area Office distribution). These pages should
be attached in the corresponding publication.
NOTE:
When ordering a technical publication (i.e. Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring
Diagram) From the MDC, any Correction Page(s) associated with that particular
Publication, will be automatically included with your order.
Additional Correction Pages are available through the Dealer Support Material Network
(MDC NPM System) via the corresponding part numbers from the following table:
Parts
Information
PUBLICATION
`95 LS 400
Repair Manual
`96 LS 400
Repair Manual
NUMBER
RM405U1
RM439U1
RM514U1
PAGE(S)
DESCRIPTION
ATĆ74
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONTROUBLESHOOTING.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREStep 1 was completely revised.
Step 2, P 1. Remove transmission.
was revised to 1. Remove the oil
pan.
00245ĆRM405Ć6012
ATĆ51
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONTROUBLESHOOTING.
INSPECTION PROCEDUREStep 1 was completely revised.
Step 2, P 1. Remove transmission.
was revised to 1. Remove the oil
pan.
00245ĆRM439Ć6012
BRAKE Ć FRONT BRAKE.
5. MEASURE DISC RUNOUT Ć (B)
Text revised to include . . . grind it on a
oncar" brake lathe.
BRAKE Ć FRONT BRAKE (Disc Brake)
4. MEASURE DISC RUNOUT Ć Text reĆ
vised to include . . . grind it on a oncar"
brake lathe.
00245ĆRM514Ć6041
BRAKE Ć FRONT BRAKE.
3. MEASURE DISC RUNOUT Ć Text
revised to include . . . grind it on a
oncar" brake lathe.
00245ĆRM512Ć6041
BRĆ18
`97 LS 400
Repair Manual
RM514U
`97 GS 300
Repair Manual
RM512U
BRĆ24
BRĆ17
PART NUMBER
Page 1 of 2
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PUBLICATION CORRECTION INFORMATION
PG001-97
TSIB
Title:
PUBLICATION CORRECTION INFORMATION – PG001-97
Parts
Information
(Continued)
PUBLICATION
`97 GS 300
Repair Manual
`97 ES 300
Repair Manual
`97 LX 450
Repair Manual
Page 2 of 2
NUMBER
RM512U
RM511U
RM515U
February 28, 1997
PAGE(S)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
BRĆ20
BRAKE Ć REAR BRAKE (Disc Brake).
REAR BRAKE COMPONENTS INĆ
SPECTION AND REPAIR.
3. MEASURE DISC RUNOUT Ć Text reĆ
vised to include . . . grind it on a oncar"
brake lathe.
00245ĆRM512Ć6041
DIĆ248
BRAKE Ć ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM.
DTC Ć REAR SPEED ROTOR FAULTY Ć
Revised to 33, 34.
00245ĆRM511Ć6048
BRĆ10
BRAKE Ć BRAKE BOOSTER
ASSEMBLY.
BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY Ć Entire
page has been revised from Brake MasĆ
ter Cylinder Removal and Disassembly
to Brake Booster Assembly Operational
Test and Components.
00245ĆRM515Ć6055
Models:
March 21, 1997
Introduction
All Models
Based on the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208, the Air Bag
Information label (1) will be hung on the glove box door for vehicles having a passenger
side air bag and produced on or after 2/25/97.
NOTE:
The air bag caution label (2) affixed voluntarily on the passenger side end of
the vehicle dash will be eliminated with this change.
Affected
Vehicles
S
LS 400, GS 300, SC 400, SC 300, ES 300, LX 450 built after February 25, 1997.
NOTE:
The Air Bag Information label is NOT required on vehicles built prior to 2/25/97.
Parts
Information
Procedure
NEW PART NUMBER
PART NAME
74599–06010
Label, Driver and Passenger Information
1. During PDS, check to insure that
vehicles produced on or after 2/25/97
are in compliance with FMVSS 208 by
having the label hung on the glove box
door.
2. If the label is missing or damaged, the
appropriate label can be ordered
through the parts system.
Page 1 of 1
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
AIR BAG INFORMATION LABEL ON GLOVE
BOX DOOR
PG002–97
TSIB
Title:
Models:
July 18, 1997
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Certification
Label
Criteria
All Models
Replacement Certification Labels (vinyl label affixed to driver’s door or door post) may be
available from Lexus providing the request meets one of the criteria listed below.
• All Lexus vehicles.
1. The vehicle is in an accident and the label is damaged or is attached to a part that will
be replaced during the repair.
NOTE:
• Processing a new label will be delayed if the old certification label is not
available.
• A new label MAY NOT be available if the vehicle is more than five years old and
the old label does not accompany this request.
2. The label is stolen.
Procurement
Procedure
To request a replacement label, complete a copy of the form on the back of this bulletin.
Your dealer parts account will be billed $10.00 for each replacement of a damaged or
stolen label.
NOTE:
All replacement labels for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval
by the Technical Compliance Department. If you have any specific questions,
contact (310)781-3390.
Warranty
Information
• No applicable Warranty Information
Page 1 of 2
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABELS
PG003-97
TSIB
Title:
NOTE:
Original label MUST accompany this application or order will be delayed.
Page 2 of 2
REF:
NO:
PRODUCT GENERAL
INFORMATION
PG004–96
DATE:
SEPTEMBER 6, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
Title 1997 ES 300 SHORT PIN INSTALLATION DURING PDS
Page 1 of 1
To minimize battery discharge during transportation and storage, the Short Pin has been removed at the
assembly plant.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
The Short Pin is stored in the Engine Room J/B No.
2 in the engine compartment as shown in Figure A.
NOTE:
Removal of the Short Pin cuts off
the power source to the Dome Fuse
and ECU–B fuse.
Fig. A
During PDS (Pre-Delivery Service) install the Short
Pin in the correct position as shown in Figures B and
C.
Engine Room J/B No. 2
CAUTION:The Short Pin is not a fuse. Please
install only in the position shown in
Figure C.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is stored at the
dealership for a long period of time
after PDS, disconnect the negative
battery terminal to prevent battery
discharge. Refer to TSIB EL002-96
for battery maintenance information.
Fig. B
Engine Room J/B No. 2
Fig. C
Models:
All Models
July 18, 1997
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
Replacement
VIN Plate
Criteria
Replacement VIN plates (metal plate riveted to dashboard) may be available from Lexus
providing the request meets one of the criteria listed below.
• All Lexus vehicles.
• The vehicle is in an accident and the plate is damaged.
NOTE:
The plate to be replaced MUST accompany the request.
NOTE:
If a plate is stolen, be sure to contact the State Police or the Department of Motor
Vehicles. In most cases the state will issue a unique number so that the original
number can be included on stolen vehicle listings. If this is the case, a replacement
VIN plate is NOT available from Lexus. However, the original VIN, NOT the stateissued VIN, must be used on all warranty claims.
Procurement
Procedure
To request a replacement plate, complete a copy of the form on the back of this page.
Note that damaged VIN plates must accompany the request form. Your dealer parts
account will be billed $10.00 for each replacement of a damaged plate.
NOTE:
All replacement plates for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval
by the Technical Compliance Department. If you have any specific questions,
contact (310)781-3390.
Warranty
Information
• No applicable Warranty Information.
Page 1 of 2
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
REPLACEMENT VIN PLATES
PG004-97
TSIB
Title:
Page 2 of 2
REF:
NO:
PRODUCT GENERAL
INFORMATION
PG005–96
DATE:
SEPTEMBER 6, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
Title ‘97 ES 300 FRONT SUSPENSION SPACERS REMOVAL DURING PDS
Page 1 of 2
To prevent damage to the underside of the front bumper during vehicle transport, suspension spacers
have been installed on the front coil springs for the 1997 ES 300.
Please use the following procedures to remove the suspension spacers during PDS (Pre–Delivery
Service).
SUSPENSION SPACERS REMOVAL PROCEDURE:
1. During the Under Vehicle (On Hoist) checks portion
of the Pre-Delivery Service, raise the vehicle to
extend the suspension.
2. Firmly grasp the lower part of the spring spacer
with your hand.
‘97 ES 300 FRONT SUSPENSION SPACERS REMOVAL DURING PDS
Page 2 of 2
SUSPENSION SPACERS REMOVAL PROCEDURE (Cont’d):
3. Pull the spring spacer toward you and push it upward.
4. Pull the ring spacer downward to remove.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 above on the other side to complete removal of the spring spacers.
REF:
NO:
PRODUCT GENERAL
INFORMATION
PG006–96
DATE:
SEPTEMBER 6, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
Title 1997 ES 300 LICENSE PLATE INSTALLATION DURING PDS
Page 1 of 2
During shipment the 1997 ES 300 front license plate mounting bracket and two attaching screws are
placed in a plastic bag in the luggage compartment. Install the mounting bracket cover on the front
bumper during PDS (Pre-Delivery Service) according to the following procedures.
FRONT LICENSE PLATE INSTALLATION:
1. Align the holes marked “A” on the mounting
bracket with the dimples on the front bumper
cover. Mark the location of the holes marked
“B” on the front bumper cover.
NOTE:
Holes marked “A” are used for
installation of the mounting bracket to
the bumper cover. Holes marked “B”
are used for installation of the license
plate to the mounting bracket.
2. Drill 2 relief holes, 11 mm (7/16 in.) in diameter,
through the bumper cover at the marks made
at holes marked “B”. The relief holes provide
clearance to prevent the license plate retaining
screw from contacting the bumper cover.
NOTE:
Do NOT drill at the dimples on the front
bumper cover.
1997 ES 300 LICENSE PLATE INSTALLATION DURING PDS
FRONT LICENSE PLATE INSTALLATION:
3. Install the mounting bracket to the front of the bumper
cover (at holes marked “A”) using the 2 tapping screws
supplied with the bracket.
4. Install the license plate to its bracket using 2 tapping
screws with the following dimensions:
S
Nominal length (L):
< 25.0 mm (9.8 in.)
S
Diameter:
6.0 mm (0.24 in.)
S
Pitch:
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Page 2 of 2
REF:
NO:
SPECIAL SERVICE
TOOLS
SS001–96
DATE:
AUGUST 20, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
Title VERSION 3.1 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL SET SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION PROBLEM WITH
1997 ES 300
Due to a change in communication standard for the 1997 ES 300, the Version 3.1 Diagnostic Tool Set
Software will display the error message below when the technician attempts to use the ALL DATA list or
the ACTIVE TEST functions in ENHANCED OBD II.
NO RESPONSE
FROM VEHICLE.
CHECK CONNECTION
TO VEHICLE.
OR
THIS TEST IS NOT
SUPPORTED FOR
THIS VEHICLE.
This problem will be corrected with the release of 1997 Model Year software in November. Until then, there
are two alternatives for diagnosing the ES 300 with the current Version 3.1 software:
1. ENHANCED OBD II
D
USER DATA list (less than 50 data lines)
D
Specialized data list from SELECT DATA menu (MISFIRE, O2 SENSOR, EGR, etc.)
2. CARB ORB II
D
All CARB OBD II function work normally.
Models:
All Models
September 26, 1997
Introduction
When inspecting or making brake booster push rod adjustments with SST 09737–00010,
it is necessary to assure proper tool configuration prior to use. The SST has a reversible
center plunger that allows it to function on a wide range of Lexus vehicles. Prior to using,
verify that it is configured correctly for the application by checking the master cylinder
outer diameter at the point illustrated below. The dimensions for the SST, Part Number
09737–00010, are also shown in the illustrations below.
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
PART NUMBER
PART NAME
09737–00010
Brake Booster Push Rod Gauge (SST)
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
N/A
Not applicable to warranty
–
–
T1
T2
–
–
Page 1 of 1
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
BRAKE BOOSTER PUSH ROD GAUGE (SST)
SS001–97
TSIB
Title:
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
SS95–002
OCTOBER 27, 1995
ALL MODELS
ENGINE SUPPORT BAR IMPROVEMENTS
Page 1 of 1
A new engine support bar, P/N 00002–01724, has been released by OTC. This new tripod design
engine support bar, which is designed to support engine weight while transmission service is being
performed, supersedes the current bipod engine support bar, P/N 00002–01722.
For dealers who currently own the 00002–01722 engine support bar, OTC has developed an
upgrade kit, P/N 00002–01724–U which includes all necessary components and hardware to convert
it to the new tripod design. To avoid the potential for personal injury or property damage, do
not use the existing engine support bar without the new upgrade kit.
00002–01724
00002–01724–U
TRIPOD ENGINE SUPPORT BAR KIT
TRIPOD UPGRADE KIT
BOLT
BOLT
DEALER PRICING IS AS FOLLOWS:
AVAILABLE SST’S
TOOL NUMBER
TOOL NAME
PRICE
00002–01724
Tripod Engine Support Bar Kit
$165.35
00002–01724–U
Tripod Upgrade Kit
$ 77.25
For more information and to order these Special Service Tools, please call OTC at
800–933–8335.
REF:
SUSPENSION
NO:
SU005–96
DATE:
NOVEMBER 29, 1996
MODEL: ES 300
KNOCKING NOISE UNDER FLOOR IN REAR
Page 1 of 2
To eliminate a knocking noise heard under the floor in the rear, caused by interference between the rear
floor side member and the front end of the rear strut rod, the clearance between the side member and
the rear strut rod has been increased.
Rear Strut Rod
Floor Side Member
“A” Section
“A” Section
Floor Panel
Floor Panel
Floor Side Member
Strut Rod
Strut Rod Bush
Previous
B – B’ Cross Section
PRODUCTION EFFECTIVE:
Starting VIN:
JT8BF22G–V0002236
New
KNOCKING NOISE UNDER FLOOR IN REAR
Page 2 of 2
FIELD FIX PROCEDURE:
1. Raise vehicle on hoist.
2. Remove rear strut rod.
a. Remove the bolt and disconnect the
parking brake cable.
b. Remove the two bolts and nuts.
c.. Remove the strut rod.
3. Using a brass bar and a hammer, dent the
cross hatched area of the rear floor side
member by about 1–2 mm in order to increase
the clearance between the front end of the
rear strut rod and the side member. There
may be a shinny area where the strut rod has
made metal–to–metal contact.
Note:
Rear Floor Side Member
Make sure that the end of the
brass bar is smooth and rounded to
prevent damage to the vehicle
floor.
4. Apply a rust preventive sealer to the area that
has been modified.
5. Reinstall the rear strut rod with the two bolts
and nuts.
Note:
Do not torque the bolts until the
vehicle is lowered and the
suspension has been stabilized.
6. Reinstall the parking cable with the bolt.
Torque: 5.4 NSm (55 KgScm, 48 inSlb)
7. Lower the vehicle, stabilize the suspension at
ride height, then torque the rear strut rod bolts.
Torque: 113 NSm (1,150 KgScm, 83 ftSlb)
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
OPCODE
SU6010
DESCRIPTION
Knocking noise under floor in rear
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
0.5
48780–33010
91
57
Applicable Warranty Coverage: 4 years/50,000 miles Basic Warranty Coverage.
TC003–97
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION
Models:
’97 ES 300 WITH A541E ATM
October 17, 1997
Introduction
To prevent overheating of the transmission when towing a weight of more than 1,000
pounds, a transmission oil cooler should be installed. The transmission oil cooler and
required hardware for installation are available through normal parts supply.
S
Towing
Capacity
Up to 2,000 pounds (with transmission cooler installed).
Fig. 1
Affected
Vehicles
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
S
1997 ES 300s with A541E Automatic Transmissions.
PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY
32910–33040
Oil Cooler Assembly
1
32907–33050
Oil Cooler Tube No. 2
1
32907–33090
Oil Cooler Tube No. 1
1
90445–17101
180 mm (7.09”) Oil Cooler Hose
1
90445–17069
190 mm (7.48”) Oil Cooler Hose
1
90445–17139
130 mm (5.12”) Oil Cooler Hose
3
90445–17151
140 mm (5.51”) Oil Cooler Hose
1
90119–06518
Bolt
3
91611–60816
Bolt
2
90467–16013
Hose Clamp with installation clips
12
90179–06058
Nut
1
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
N/A
No applicable warranty information
–
–
T1
T2
–
–
Page 1 of 6
TRANSMISSION & CLUTCH
TSIB
Title:
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION – TC003–97
Procedure
1. Parts removal in preparation for cooler
installation:
A. Remove the 9 bolts, 2 screws and
the center engine under cover.
Fig. 2
B. Remove the engine coolant
temperature switch connector and
the wire clamp.
Fig. 3
C. Remove battery and tray.
D. Disconnect the cooling fan
connector.
E. Disconnect the No.1 engine coolant
temperature switch wire connector.
F. Remove the 2 bolts and then the
cooling fan.
Fig. 4
Page 2 of 6
October 17, 1997
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION – TC003–97
Procedure
(Continued)
October 17, 1997
2. Cooler Installation:
A. Install the 140 mm (5.51”) hose to
the oil cooler tube No. 1 as shown.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamp with the hose
clamp clip at the position shown, and
use pliers to pull off the clip in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Fig. 5
B. Install the tube bracket onto the left
side of the front suspension
member with the 2 bolts as shown.
Torque:
62 inSlbf
(7 NSm/71 kgfScm)
Fig. 6
C. Install the 130 mm (5.12”) hoses
and the 180 mm (7.09”) hose to the
oil cooler tube No. 2 as shown.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamps with the hose
clamp clips at the positions shown,
and use pliers to pull off the clips in
the direction indicated by the arrows.
Fig. 7
Page 3 of 6
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION – TC003–97
Procedure
(Continued)
October 17, 1997
D. Remove the lower side clip of the
radiator side LH deflector.
E. Install the tube bracket with the bolt
on the side member.
Torque:
62 inSlbf
(7 NSm/71 kgfScm)
F. Reinstall the lower side clip of the
radiator LH deflector.
Fig. 8
G. Connect the hoses from the oil
cooler tube No.2 to the oil cooler
tube No.1.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamps with the hose
clamp clips at the positions shown,
and use pliers to pull off the clips in
the direction indicated by the arrows.
Fig. 9
H. Disconnect the hose from the oil
cooler pipe of the radiator LH side.
NOTE:
Place a container below vehicle to
catch any leaking ATF. Remove the
other end of the hose from transaxle
and discard.
I.
Connect the hose from oil cooler
tube No. 1 to the oil cooler pipe of
the radiator LH side.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamp with the hose
clamp clip at the position shown, and
use pliers to pull off the clip in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Page 4 of 6
Fig. 10
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION – TC003–97
Procedure
(Continued)
October 17, 1997
J. Install the 190 mm (7.48”) hose
between the oil cooler tube No.1
and transaxle oil cooler tube.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamps with the hose
clamp clips at the positions shown,
and use pliers to pull off the clips in
the direction indicated by the arrows.
Fig. 11
K. Install the oil cooler onto the center
brace and front cross member
using the two bolts and nut as
illustrated in figure 12.
Torque:
65.5 inSlbf
(7.4 NSm/75.5 kgfScm)
Fig. 12
L. Connect the hoses to the pipes
.
NOTE:
Install the hose clamps with the hose
clamp clips at the positions shown,
and use pliers to pull off the clips in
the direction indicated by the arrows.
Fig. 13
Page 5 of 6
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER INSTALLATION – TC003–97
Procedure
(Continued)
October 17, 1997
3. Final Assembly:
A. Reconnect the coolant temperature
switch connector and wire clamp as
illustrated in figure 14.
Fig. 14
B. Install the cooling fan with 2 bolts.
C. Reconnect the cooling fan
connector and the No. 1 engine
temperature switch wire connector
as shown in figure 15.
D. Reinstall the battery and tray.
E. Start the engine.
F. With the engine at idle and the
brake pedal depressed, shift the
selector into all positions from “P” to
“L”, and return to “P” position.
Fig. 15
G. Check for leaks from the hose
joints.
H. Add new fluid type ATF DSII or
DEXRONSIII (DEXRONSII).
Fig. 16
NOTE:
Additional capacity with cooler will be
0.38 US quarts (0.36 liters).
I.
Shift the selector into all positions
from “P” to “L”, and return to “P”.
J. Check fluid level with engine idling
at normal operating temperature of
158r to 176rF (70 to 80rC) and add
more fluid if required.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
Fig. 17
K. Shut off the engine and reinstall the
center engine under cover with 9
bolts and 2 screws as shown in
figure 18.
Fig. 18
Page 6 of 6
TC004–97
OIL PAN, DIP STICK & C1 CLUTCH ON A541E
Models:
’97 ES 300
October 24, 1997
Introduction
The following production changes have occurred on the A541E transaxle:
1. The oil pan and dipstick have been redesigned for increased oil capacity.
2. The C1 clutch has been changed for improved durability.
Transmission
Production
Change
Information
Parts
Information
A/T MODEL
A/T SERIAL NO.
A541E
E0619902–
OLD PART NUMBER
NEW PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY
30500–33210
30500–33211
Transaxle Assembly, Automatic
1
35106–33010
35106–33020
Pan Sub–assembly, Transaxle Oil *2
1
35103–33120
35103–33160
Gauge Sub–assembly, Transaxle Oil Level *1
1
35701–33030
35701–33050
Shaft Sub–assembly, Input
1
35633–33010
35633–33100
Disc, C1 Clutch
5
Plate, C1 Clutch *1 *3
5
35634–33010
35634–33020
35634–33060
04352–33050
04352–33051
Overhaul Kit, Automatic Transmission
1
*1 Not interchangeable with previous parts.
*2 When using the new oil pan on the old transmission it is necessary to also use the new dip stick.
*3 Quantity: 35634–33010 = 4, 35634–33020 = 1 has been changed to 35634–33060 = 5
Warranty
Information
Details of
Production
Change
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
T1
T2
–
–
1. Transaxle Oil Pan
A. The Oil Pan depth has been
increased as indicated by
dimensions A and B (illustration
and table).
OLD DIMENSION
NEW DIMENSION
A 31.9 mm (1.256”) 34.9 mm (1.374”)
B 15.0 mm (0.591”) 18.0mm (0.709”)
Page 1 of 2
TRANSMISSION & CLUTCH
TSIB
Title:
OIL PAN, DIP STICK & C1 CLUTCH ON A541E – TC004–97
Details of
Production
Change
(Continued)
B. With the oil pan change, the oil level
gauge (dip stick) has been revised.
OLD DIMENSION
C
NEW DIMENSION
62 mm (2.44”)
D 41.5 mm (1.634”) 50.0 mm (1.969”)
E 34.5 mm (1.358”) 42.0 mm (1.654”)
F 10.0 mm (0.394”)
9.0 mm (0.354”)
2. Forward Multiple Disc Clutch Assembly
A. C1 clutch plate thickness has been
increased to 2.0 mm (0.078”).
OLD DIMENSION
G
1.4 mm (0.055”)
H
1.6 mm (0.063”)
NEW DIMENSION
2.0 mm (0.078")
B. Input Shaft Sub–Assembly changed
to accommodate thicker C1 clutch
plates.
OLD DIMENSION
I
NEW DIMENSION
31.7 mm (1.248”) 33.9 mm (1.335”)
C. C1 Clutch Disc material has been
changed. Identifying marks can be
found on the facing.
J
Page 2 of 2
PREVIOUS
CURRENT
AD505
AD506
October 24, 1997
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
MOON ROOF WIND THROB NOISE
Models:
’97 & ’98 ES 300
January 23, 1998
Introduction
To eliminate wind throb on 1997 and 1998 ES 300 vehicles when the moon roof is fully
opened, the roof wind deflector has been raised 3 mm as shown.
Roof Wind Deflector Panel
New Height
Roof Wind Deflector Panel
Roof Panel
3 mm
Current Height
Production
Change
Information
S 1997 & 1998 ES 300s starting with VINs:
JT8BF28G3W0102176 (TMC – Plant Code “0” – 11th digit)
JT8BF28GXW5029522 (TMK – Plant Code “5” – 11th digit)
Parts
Information
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
63209–33030
63209–22040
Roof Wind Deflector Panel Sub–Assembly
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
614121
R&R Roof Panel Subassembly
0.2
63209–33030
T1
T2
59 14
Applicable Warranty:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
Field Fix
Procedure
Replace Roof Wind Deflector Panel subassembly with the new part.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
NVH
NV001–98
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
January 12, 2005
Introduction
IRON PARTICLE RUST
CONTAMINATION REPAIR
Models:
’94 – Current
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide information regarding the proper procedures to
clean vehicles that may have been subjected to contamination by airborne iron particles
such as rail dust.
S 1994 – Current model year Lexus vehicles.
Applicable
Vehicles
Required
Tools &
Materials
TOOLS & MATERIALS
QUANTITY
Auto Magicr Special Cleaner Concentratet #713*
1
Rubber Gloves, Aprons, Boots
Eye Protection
As Needed
Sponges or Wash Mitts
Pail or Bucket
*
Condition
Inspection
Contact the main office of Auto Wax Company Inc. (1–800–826–0828 or www.automagic.biz) to find a
local source for Auto Magicr Special Cleaner Concentrate.t
During rail transportation or extended storage near industrial areas, vehicles may
occasionally be subjected to contamination by airborne iron particles shed from railroad
tracks, train wheels, exposure to heavy machinery facilities, grinding, welding, etc.
This type of contamination can be identified by the presence of small red or brown
particles on the paint surface. These particles are often difficult to see on dark color
paints, but can be easily felt when brushing a hand across horizontal body surfaces such
as hood, roof, or deck lid.
CAUTION:
Because of the abrasiveness of these small iron particles, polishing or buffing
procedures should not be attempted to repair the paint surface of an affected vehicle.
This will result in further paint damage and detract from vehicle appearance.
Repair
Warranty
Information
Washing the affected paint surfaces with Auto Magicr Special Cleaner Concentratet is
the recommended method to dislodge embedded iron particles and remove the
surrounding rust stains. The correct usage of Auto Magicr Special Cleaner
Concentratet is described in this bulletin.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
PAINT
PA001-05
Title:
IRON PARTICLE RUST CONTAMINATION REPAIR – PA001-05
General
Precautions
January 12, 2005
WARNING:
Auto Magicr Special Cleaner Concentratet is a corrosive material. Appropriate
personal protection equipment must be worn to protect persons performing the
contamination removal procedure. Please refer to the precautions on the product prior
to use.
CAUTION:
Consult local or state regulations regarding the handling, use, and disposal of Auto
Magicr Special Cleaner Concentratet prior to use.
Under no circumstances should contamination removal be performed in direct
sunlight or contamination removal solution be allowed to dry on vehicle surfaces, as
staining of plastic, rubber, or painted parts may result.
Repair
Procedure
1. Move vehicle out of direct sunlight. Initially rinse with cool water then wash with liquid
car wash detergent. Rinse again thoroughly with fresh water.
2. Dilute the mixture to a 1:8 ratio for painted surfaces. Use the recommended dilution
ratio when applying to any other surface. Apply the diluted cleaner concentrate so
that it evenly covers the affected area. Use an appropriate mitt or sponge to agitate
the surface.
3. Thoroughly rinse vehicle with fresh water.
4. Inspect vehicle carefully both visually and by feel to determine if all iron particles
have been removed. Repeat the wash several times if necessary to achieve
complete removal.
5. Dry vehicle with a soft terry cloth towel and apply a non–abrasive, non–silicone glaze
to obtain a high–gloss finish.
Page 2 of 2
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
April 7, 2000
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
CA/50 STATE CERTIFIED EMISSION
CONTROL UNDERHOOD LABEL
ORDERING
Models:
All Models
It is no longer necessary to fax the CA/50 State Emission Control Label Order Form
to TMS. California (CA) and 50 State Certified underhood emission control labels
(emission labels) may now be obtained through your dealership Parts Department
utilizing standard replacement parts ordering procedures via the TDN. Follow the
guidelines outlined in this TSB to ensure proper label application.
S All model year Lexus Vehicles.
We have included a table showing 1995 – 2000 U.S. model numbers and their
exhaust emissions certifications. Please continue to consult the Electronic Parts
Catalog (EPC) or the parts microfiche for emission label parts numbers.
NOTE:
Although the California Smog Impact Fee has been discontinued, dealers are still
required by regulation to verify the correct emission label is installed on the correct
vehicle.
REGULATIONS:
The United States Clean Air Act, Title II, Sections 202, 203, 205, and 207 mandates that
the emission control label must correctly match the emissions equipment on the
vehicle. Any person violating this requirement is subject to applicable State penalties
and a Federal civil penalty of no more than $25,000 for each instance.
Personnel at franchised dealerships are authorized to affix such labels to vehicles and
are, therefore, subject to this regulation and the attendant penalties.
S Do not sell the labels over the counter. Always install the label on the vehicle.
S Never install a California and/or 50 State Label on a vehicle that is not a
California/50 State Emission Certified Vehicle.
S Do not install Federal Emission labels on vehicles that are not Federal Emissions
Certified.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 4
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG001–00
Title:
CA/50 STATE CERTIFIED EMISSION CONTROL UNDERHOOD LABEL ORDERING – PG001–00
Label
Ordering
Procedure
April 7, 2000
To ensure that the emission control labels are affixed to the correct vehicle, it is
necessary to follow these procedures:
1. Record the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) from the vehicle requiring a
replacement label.
2. Refer to the Vehicle Detail screen in the Lexus Service Inquiry system to determine
the correct 4–digit U.S. model number for the VIN in question.
3. Determine the vehicle’s emission certification using the U.S. model number and the
attached tables.
4. Once the emissions equipment information is verified, obtain the part number
information by consulting the EPC/microfiche.
5. Order the label through your Parts Department, using normal parts ordering
procedures via the TDN.
6. When the part arrives, verify that the emission label matches the emissions
equipment on the vehicle. This will ensure the correct label is affixed to the vehicle.
1995 MY
Emission
Control
Labels
Year
1995
Page 2 of 4
Model
CA Emission
Model No.
50 States Emission
Model No.
ES 300
9010
9000
SC 300
9210, 9211
9200, 9201
SC 400
9230
GS 300
9310
9300
LS 400
9110
9100
N/A
Federal Emission
Model No.
9220
CA/50 STATE CERTIFIED EMISSION CONTROL UNDERHOOD LABEL ORDERING – PG001–00
1996 MY
Emission
Control
Labels
Year
1996
1997 MY
Emission
Control
Labels
Year
1997
1998 MY
Emission
Control
Labels
Year
1998
50 States Emission
Model No.
April 7, 2000
Model
CA Emission
Model No.
ES 300
9010
9000
SC 300
9210, 9211
9200, 9201
SC 400
9230
GS 300
9310
LS 400
9110
9100
LX 450
9610
9600
Model
CA Emission
Model No.
ES 300
9010
9000
SC 300
9210, 9211
9200, 9201
SC 400
9230
GS 300
9310
LS 400
9110
9100
LX 450
9610
9600
Model
CA Emission
Model No.
ES 300
9010
9000
SC 300
9210
9200
SC 400
9230
9220
GS 300
9310
GS 400
9330
9320
LS 400
9110
9100
LX 470
9630
9620
N/A
50 States Emission
Model No.
N/A
50 States Emission
Model No.
N/A
Federal Emission
Model No.
9220
9300
Federal Emission
Model No.
9220
9300
Federal Emission
Model No.
9300
Page 3 of 4
CA/50 STATE CERTIFIED EMISSION CONTROL UNDERHOOD LABEL ORDERING – PG001–00
1999 MY
Emission
Control
Labels
Year
Model
CA Emission
Model No.
ES 300
9000, 9010
SC 300
9200, 9210
SC 400
1999
2000 MY
Emission
Control
Labels
Year
GS 300
Page 4 of 4
Federal Emission
Model No.
9220, 9230
N/A
9300, 9310
GS 400
9320, 9330
LS 400
9100, 9110
N/A
RX 300
9410, 9414
9420, 9424
9400, 9404
LX 470
N/A
9620, 9630
N/A
Model
CA Emission
Model No.
50 States Emission
Model No.
Federal Emission
Model No.
ES 300
9000
SC 300
9200
SC 400
9220
GS 300
2000
50 States Emission
Model No.
April 7, 2000
GS 400
9300
N/A
9320
LS 400
9100
RX 300
9420, 9424
LX 470
9620
N/A
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
VOLUME 4 INFORMATION
Models:
All Models
January 1, 1999
Introduction
Lexus Technical Service Information Bulletins (TSIBs) continue to be one of the most
current sources of technical information available. To ensure complete access to this
reference source, use the following steps:
S Volume Four will begin with 1999 Technical Service Information Bulletins.
S Place this bulletin along with all 1999 TSIBs into the new binders received with this
bulletin.
S Label this new binder “Volume Four“ using the labels provided with the binder.
S Additional copies of 1994 through 1999 TSIBs are available to all Lexus Dealerships
through the Non–Parts System (MDC NPM System) by using the following Part
Number designation:
TSB Part Number Prefix
TSB Chapter Code
Chapter Code Sequence Number
Year
00216
Related TSIB
Part Numbers
– EG 001 – 99
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
1999 TSIB Binder complete with all bulletins issued to date
VOL4
New TSIB Binder and tabs only
00216–00001
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG001–99
Title:
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX
Models:
All Models
December 24, 1999
Introduction
Corrections have been made in the repair manuals listed below. Corrections available in
the last quarter are marked in red, and have already been mailed to all dealers.
Parts
Information
Correction Pages are available through the Dealer Support Material Network (MDC NPM
System) via the corresponding part numbers from the following table:
NOTE:
When ordering a technical publication (i.e. Repair Manual, Electrical Wiring Diagram)
from the MDC, any Correction Page(s) associated with that particular Publication will
automatically be included with your order.
Publication
Number
Page(s)
Part Number
ES 300
1997 ES 300 . . . . . . . . RM511–U . . . . . .
1998 ES 300 . . . . . . . . RM577–U . . . . . .
.....................................
1999 ES 300 . . . . . . . . RM667–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
DI–198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM511–9064
DI–232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM577–9064
DI–251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–8122
DI–92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–9009
DI–234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–9064
DI–235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–9009
DI–243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–9064
DI–255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–9009
DI–258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM667–8101
IN–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
IN–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
GS 400/300
1998 GS 400/300 . . . RM583–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM583–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
DI–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM583–8122
DI–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BE–161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM583–8118
BR–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM583–8032
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 4
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
PG002–99
Title:
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-99 Revised
Publication
Number
December 24, 1999
Page(s)
Part Number
GS 400/300
(Continued)
1998 GS 400/300 . . . RM583–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
1999 GS 400/300 . . . RM665–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
SA–29
SA–31
SA–53
SA–29
SF–31
LS 400
1998 LS 400 . . . . . . . . RM578–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
1998 LS 400 . . . . . . . . RM578–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
BE–170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM578–8118
SA–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM578–8059
SA–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM578–8059
SA–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM578–9064
LX 470
1998 LX 470 . . . . . . . . RM620–U . . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
1998 LX 470 . . . . . . . . RM620–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
PP–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8060
PP–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
PP–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
PP–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SS–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
TR–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
IN–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8039
DI–221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8041
DI–223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8086
DI–246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 2 of 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM583–9064
................................. ↓
................................. ↓
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM665–9064
................................. ↓
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-99 Revised
Publication
Number
Page(s)
December 24, 1999
Part Number
LX 470
(Continued)
1998 LX 470 . . . . . . . RM620–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
1998 LX 470 . . . . . . . . RM620–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
1998 LX 470 . . . . . . . . RM620–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
1999 LX 470 . . . . . . . . RM662–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
1999 LX 470 . . . . . . . . RM662–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
DI–267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8045
DI–389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–578 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8118
SS–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–9018
BE–103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–9020
BR–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8039A
EM–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–9044
SA–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–9018A
SA–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SA–183 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–8058
SR–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM620–9029
SR–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SS–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM662–9018
DI–594 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM662–8118
BE–103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM662–9020
EM–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM662–9044
SA–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM662–9018A
SA–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM662–9029
SR–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
SR–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
RX 300
1999 RX 300 . . . . . . . RM662–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM626–U2 . . . . .
DI–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM626–8122
DI–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
IN–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM626–8100
IN–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
IN–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
BE–131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM626–8118
SC 300/400
1997 SC 400/300 . . . . RM513–U . . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
1998 SC 400/300 . . . . RM590–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
SA–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM513–9006
SA–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI–466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM590–8096
DI–467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Page 3 of 4
REPAIR MANUAL CORRECTIONS INDEX – PG002-99 Revised
Publication
SC 400/300
(Continued)
Page 4 of 4
Number
....................................
.....................................
.....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM590–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
1999 SC 400/300 . . . . RM666–U1 . . . . .
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
.....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RM666–U2 . . . . .
.....................................
Page(s)
December 24, 1999
Part Number
DI–468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–762 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM590–8118
PP–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM590–9006A
SA–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM590–9006B
SA–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM666–8096
DI–481 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
DI–738 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM666–8118
PP–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM666–9006A
SA–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00245–RM666–9006B
SA–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ↓
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
September 26, 2003
Introduction
WARRANTY PARTS
MARKING PROCEDURE
Models:
All Models
Effective September 1, 2003, all warranty parts (as indicated on the next page) must be
marked in the area or location of the failure. The technician should complete this
procedure after the failed part has been removed from the vehicle and before the part is
placed in the 10–bin storage. (Exchanged parts and remanufactured parts are not
included in this procedure.)
Failed parts marking will be beneficial in detecting and resolving product and parts quality
issues. This will also offer additional opportunities to make future enhancements to our
parts and products.
Parts are subject to random inspection in the dealership by field representatives to
ensure compliance with this new policy.
Failure to comply with this policy may result in a debit of the corresponding
warranty claim(s).
Applicable
Vehicles
Parts
Marking
Procedure
S All models.
All technicians must follow these procedures to ensure proper parts marking:
S Wipe the part clean (no excess fluid should be present).
S Indicate area of defect or failure by marking the specific part(s) with a water
resistant permanent marker. Use a color that can be easily seen against the
background of the part being marked. For dark surfaces the color yellow is highly
recommended as well as the color black for light surfaces.
S Mark the area of failure or defect by drawing a circle, a square, pointing an arrow
or adhering tape with an indication of the failed or defect location.
S Attach a completed Warranty Parts Tag (M/N 00404–PRETN–TAGS) to the
marked part.
All other parts recovery/shipping policies and procedures apply.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 3
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG006–03
Title:
WARRANTY PARTS MARKING PROCEDURE – PG006-03
Parts
Marking
Requirement
Parts
Marking
List
Dealers are requested to mark the location of the failure of all warranty parts that are
listed below. This list is not inclusive. There may be other components that can be
marked in the area of failure. All other parts that can be marked should be marked.
assist grip assy
headlamps
audio (blemish)
headliner
back door garnish
hoses
bumper covers
instrument panel safety pad sub–assy
cargo cover (retractable)
Interior light assemblies and covers
carpet
knobs, levers, handles
clutch disc
l/pulley pump assy
clutch flywheel
mirrors (side and rearview)
combination meter glass
navigation or VES screens
console and components
pillar garnish
cowl assy
rack and pinion/power steering gear assy
cowl side trim sub–assy
radiator
cupholders
room partition board
cylinder head cover sub–assy
rotors (mark where min. runout is exceeded or warped)
dash panel insulator assy
seat covers/cushions
dashboard and trim
seat tracks
disc wheel
soft trim
display panels
spare tire cover
door handle assy
steering column cover
door moulding
steering wheel
door trim panel & molding
tail lamps and covers
emblems
transmission oil pan
engine oil pan
visor
exhaust manifold
washer jar
floor and cargo mats
wheel cap
gear shift knob
wheels
grills
Page 2 of 3
September 26, 2003
WARRANTY PARTS MARKING PROCEDURE – PG006-03
Parts
Marking
List
(Continued)
September 26, 2003
NOTE:
The following parts do not have to be marked unless the technician can determine
failure and location.
air induction/ejection systems
fuel injection systems
all computers
fuel injectors
alternators
fuel pump
audio (internal)
ignition system
batteries
internal engine components
bearings
internal transmission components
belts
oil cooler
catalytic converter
power door lock switches
crankshaft
remanufactured parts
cruise control
starters
distributors
suspension components
EGR systems
valve covers
engine control systems
window regulators
exchange parts
wiper motors
exhaust systems
Page 3 of 3
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION
Models:
Applicable Models
October 11, 2002
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
This Service Bulletin is to inform you of the inspection method, and free play
specification figures for suspension ball joints. The on–vehicle inspection methods
have been standardized.
S 1990 – 2000 model year LS 400 vehicles.
S 2001 – 2003 model year LS 430 vehicles.
S 1993 – 2003 model year GS 300 vehicles.
S 1998 – 2000 model year GS 400 vehicles.
S 2001 – 2003 model year GS 430 vehicles.
S 1992 – 2000 model year SC 300 & SC 400 vehicles.
S 2002 – 2003 model year SC 430 vehicles.
S 2001 – 2003 model year IS 300 vehicles.
S 1999 – 2003 model year RX 300 vehicles.
S 1990 – 2003 model year ES 250 & ES 300 vehicles.
S 1998 – 2003 model year LX 470 vehicles.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 5
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG012-02
Title:
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION – PG012-02
Inspection
Information
Table
LOWER BALL JOINT OR SUSPENSION
BALL JOINT
MODEL
LS 400
(UCF10)
1990–1994
LS 400
(UCF20)
1995–2000
LS 430
(UCF30)
2001–2003
GS 300
(JZS147)
1993–1997
LOCATION
INSP.
METHOD
MAX. PLAY
TURNING
TORQUE
Front
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
4 in.Slbf
(0.5 NSm)
or Less
Rear
3
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
Front
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
22 in.Slbf
(2.5 NSm)
or Less
Rear
3
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
Front
1–(A)
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
Rear
3
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
Front
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
Rear
1–(A)
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
GS 300, 400,
430
(JZS16#
(JZS16#,
UZS16#)
1998–2003
Front
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
Rear
3
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
SC 300, 400
(JZZ31,
UZZ30)
1992–2000
Front
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
Rear
1–(A)
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
Front
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
Rear
3
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
SC 430
(UZZ40)
2002–2003
Page 2 of 5
October 11, 2002
UPPER BALL JOINT
INSP.
METHOD
MAX. PLAY
TURNING
TORQUE
2
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5
(3
5 NSm)
or Less
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION – PG012-02
Inspection
Information
Table
(Continued)
LOWER BALL JOINT OR SUSPENSION
BALL JOINT
MODEL
LOCATION
Front
IS 300
(JCE10)
2001–2003
RX 300
(MCU10, 15)
1999 2003
1999–2003
ES 250 & 300
(VZV21,
MCV20, 30)
1990–2003
LX 470
(UZJ100)
1998 2003
1998–2003
Free Play
Inspection
October 11, 2002
INSP.
METHOD
MAX. PLAY
TURNING
TORQUE
1–(A)
0.016 in.
(0.4) mm
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
UPPER BALL JOINT
INSP.
METHOD
MAX. PLAY
2
No Play
Felt
TURNING
TORQUE
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
Rear
3
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
Front
1–(B)
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
N/A
N/A
N/A
Rear
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Front
1–(B)
No Play
Felt
31 in.Slbf
(3.5 NSm)
or Less
N/A
N/A
N/A
Rear
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Front
1–(A)
No Play
Felt
27 in.Slbf
(3.0 NSm)
or Less
2
No Play
Felt
40 in.Slbf
(4.5 NSm)
or Less
Rear
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NOTE:
S Be sure to check the table for the
applicable inspection type based on
the vehicle model.
S Refer to the table for the standard
free play values.
1. Inspect Lower Ball Joint Free Play
A. Move the hub up and down by
hand (Most models with
wish–bone suspension):
a. Remove the tire.
b. Install the 2 lug nuts.
c. Inspect the free play while
moving the lug nuts up and
down at a force of 67 lbf
(294 N, 30 kgf).
Page 3 of 5
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION – PG012-02
Free Play
Inspection
(Continued)
B. Move the lower arm by hand (All
models with strut type suspension
and some models with wish–bone
type suspension):
a. Lift up the vehicle.
b. Inspect the free play while
moving the lower arm up and
down at a force of 67 lbf
(294 N, 30 kgf).
2. Inspect Upper Ball Joint Play
Move the upper arm by hand (Models
where the LOWER control arm are
linked by a torsion bar, and all models
using a coil spring.
A. Remove the front tire.
B. Inspect the free play while moving
the upper arm up and down at a
force of 67 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf).
3. Inspect the Suspension Arm Ball
Joint Free Play
A. Lift up the vehicle.
B. Inspect the free play while moving
the control arm by hand.
(Reference)
Free Play Inspection Method
(Gauge Installation)
S Position the dial gauge between the
arm (upper or lower) and the knuckle,
and measure free play.
(This illustration shows how to
measure free play for vehicles with
double wishbone type suspension
with coil spring).
Inspect Ball Joint Dust Cover
Check for cracks and grease leaks on the
dust cover (boots).
Page 4 of 5
October 11, 2002
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT INSPECTION – PG012-02
Turning
Torque
Inspection
October 11, 2002
Inspect Ball Joint Turning Torque
Move the stud back and forth 5 times,
then turn the stud continuously at 3–5
seconds per turn, and measure the
turning torque at the 5th turn.
HINT:
Refer to the table for standard values
for the turning torque.
Page 5 of 5
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABELS
Models:
All Models
May 4, 2001
Introduction
Replacement Certification Labels (vinyl label affixed to driver’s door or door post)
may be available from Toyota providing the request meets one of the criteria
listed below.
Certification Label Location
Applicable
Vehicles
Certification
Label Criteria
S All Lexus vehicles.
1. The vehicle is in an accident and the label is damaged or is attached to a part that will
be replaced during the repair.
NOTE:
S Processing a new label will be delayed significantly if the old certification label is
not available.
S A replacement label MAY NOT be available if the vehicle is more than 5 years old
and the old label does not accompany this request.
2. The label is stolen.
Procurement
Procedure
To request a replacement label, complete a copy of the form on the back of this bulletin.
Your dealer parts account will be billed $10.00 for each replacement of a damaged or
stolen label.
NOTE:
All replacement labels for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval by
the Technical Compliance Department. If you have any specific questions, contact
(310) 468–3390.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG015-01
Title:
APPLICATION FOR REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION LABEL
REASON FOR REPLACEMENT
ACCIDENT DAMAGE
STOLEN
OTHER
REASON/EXPLANATION
ATTACH ORIGINAL LABEL HERE
PLEASE PROVIDE CORRECT VIN
NOTE:
Original label MUST accompany this application or order will be significantly delayed.
DEALER INFORMATION
DEALER CODE:
DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
STREET ADDRESS
CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE
TELEPHONE:
(
)
AREA CODE, TELEPHONE NUMBER
CONTACT:
FIRST NAME, LAST NAME
MAIL (DO NOT FAX) THE COMPLETED REQUEST FORM WITH THE OLD LABEL TO:
TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A. INC.
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT, S207
19001 S. WESTERN AVENUE
TORRANCE, CA 90509–2991
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
REPLACEMENT VIN PLATES
Models:
All Models
May 4, 2001
Introduction
Replacement VIN plates (metal plates riveted to dashboard) may be available from
Lexus providing the request meets the criteria listed below.
VIN Plate Location
Applicable
Vehicles
Replacement
VIN Plate
Criteria
S All Lexus vehicles.
S The vehicle is in an accident and the plate is damaged.
NOTE:
The original plate to be replaced MUST accompany the request.
NOTE:
If a plate is stolen, be sure to contact the State Police or your State’s Department of
Motor Vehicles (DMV). In most cases the State DMV will issue a unique number so that
the original number can be included on stolen vehicle listings. If this is the case, a
replacement plate is NOT available from Lexus. However, the original VIN, NOT the
state issued VIN, must be used on all warranty claims.
Procurement
Procedure
To request a replacement plate, complete a copy of the form on the back of this page.
Note that the damaged VIN plate MUST accompany the request form. Your dealer parts
account will be billed $10.00 for each replacement of a damaged plate.
NOTE:
All replacement plates for damaged and/or stolen vehicles are subject to approval by
the Technical Compliance Department. If you have any specific questions, contact
(310) 468–3390.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG016-01
Title:
APPLICATION FOR REPLACEMENT VIN PLATE
REASON FOR REPLACEMENT
ACCIDENT DAMAGE
OTHER
REASON/EXPLANATION
PLEASE PROVIDE CORRECT VIN
ATTACH DAMAGED PLATE HERE
DEALER INFORMATION
DEALER CODE:
DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
STREET ADDRESS
CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE
TELEPHONE:
(
)
AREA CODE, TELEPHONE NUMBER
CONTACT:
FIRST NAME, LAST NAME
MAIL (DO NOT FAX) THE COMPLETED REQUEST FORM WITH THE OLD PLATE TO:
TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A. INC.
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT, S207
19001 S. WESTERN AVENUE
TORRANCE, CA. 90509–2991
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
YEAR 200 READINESS DISCLOSURE
Models:
All Models
December 24, 1999
Introduction
Based upon information we have obtained from our suppliers,1 all factory–installed
systems in Lexus cars and sports utility vehicles distributed and/or sold by Lexus
(”Vehicles”) will not be affected by the change of date from 1999 to the year 2000.
Lexus anticipates no problems with past, current or future Lexus brand vehicles or
Genuine Lexus parts and accessories regarding year 2000 readiness. We hope the
following information is helpful to you.
Please contact our Customer Service Department at 1–800–255–3987 should you have
any other questions.
S All Models
Applicable
Vehicles
Warranty
WARRANTY STATEMENT WITH RESPECT TO LEXUS BRAND VEHICLES
Lexus is pleased to confirm that the manufacturer’s limited express warranty and Lexus’
powertrain warranty warrant that all factory–installed systems in new Vehicles and Lexus
Certified Pre–Owned Vehicles shall be free of any defect arising solely due to a change
in date from the year 1999 to the year 2000.2
With respect to Vehicles no longer covered under such Lexus limited express warranty,
Lexus is not aware of any operational safety or functional impact the year 2000 date
change would have upon any factory–installed system in Lexus Vehicles. Should Lexus
become aware of any material impact to the operational safety or functionality of such
systems, Lexus shall publish such information promptly.
WARRANTY STATEMENT WITH RESPECT TO GENUINE LEXUS PARTS AND
ACCESSORIES
Lexus is pleased to confirm that the manufacturer’s limited express warranty warrants
that all new Lexus Genuine Parts and Accessories shall be free of any defect arising
solely due to a change in date from the year 1999 to the year 2000.2
With respect to products no longer covered under a Lexus limited express warranty,
Lexus is not aware of any operational safety or functional impact the year 2000 date
change would have upon such products. Should Lexus become aware of any material
impact to the operational safety or functionality of such a product, Lexus shall publish
such information promptly.
1
2
Lexus relies on the statements made by its suppliers and has not independently verified such information.
Please refer to terms of limited express warranty for disclaimers, limitations and restrictions.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
PRODUCT GENERAL INFORMATION
PG017–99
Title:
YEAR 2000 READINESS DISCLOSURE – PG017–99
Parts &
Accessories
December 24, 1999
GENUINE LEXUS PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Based upon information we have obtained from our suppliers,1 all new Genuine Lexus
Parts and Accessories will not be affected by the change of date from 1999 to the year
2000.
DEALER–INSTALLED AND OTHER THIRD PARTY–INSTALLED
SYSTEMS/PRODUCTS
Our dealers and distributors may sell and/or install products that are not Genuine Lexus
Parts and Accessories. Lexus can only determine the Year 2000 status of Genuine
Lexus Parts and Accessories. Therefore, the above statements do not apply to products
that are not Genuine Lexus Parts and Accessories or were not installed by the factory.
We encourage you to contact your dealer or other relevant third party regarding products
installed on your Lexus vehicle(s) that are not Genuine Lexus Parts and Accessories
and/or were not installed by the factory to determine any Year 2000 issues associated
with those products.
1
Page 2 of 2
Lexus relies on the statements made by its suppliers and has not independently verified such information.
September 8, 2003
Introduction
DIAGNOSTIC TESTER CONTROLLER
AREA NETWORK (CAN) INTERFACE
MODULE
Models:
All Models
Over the next three model years, all Lexus vehicles will begin using an all–new
diagnostic communication protocol, Controller Area Network (CAN). CAN will be
introduced on the 2004 LS 430 this fall. A CAN Interface Module has been distributed
to all dealers as an essential Special Service Tool (SST) and will allow the Diagnostic
Tester to communicate with CAN–equipped vehicles. Please use the following
instructions to install the new CAN Interface Module as soon as it arrives at
your dealership.
NOTE:
S Version 10.2a or later Diagnostic Tester Software must be used to enable
communication with CAN–equipped vehicles. Version 10.2a will be distributed to
dealers via TIS before CAN–equipped vehicles arrive at dealers.
S There is no need to remove the CAN Interface Module when working with non–CAN
systems or older software versions (Version 10.1a or earlier). The Diagnostic Tester
will communicate with all DLC3/J1962 based systems with the CAN Interface
Module installed.
S All Models.
Applicable
Vehicles
Required
SSTs
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SSTs)
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
01001270
1
01002744
1
01002593-005
1
Lexus Diagnostic Tester Kit*
CAN Interface Module Kit*
12 Megabyte Diagnostic Tester Program Card
with version 10.2a Software (or later)*
*
Essential SSTs.
NOTE:
Additional Diagnostic Tester Kits, CAN Interface Modules, Program Cards or SSTs may
be ordered by calling SPX/OTC at 1-800-933-8335.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
SS001-03
Title:
DIAGNOSTIC TESTER CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) INTERFACE – SS001-03
September 8, 2003
Installation
Procedure
Program Card With Version
10.2a (or Later) Software
DLC Cable
(P/N 02001637)
CAN Interface Module Kit
(P/N 01002744)
Vehicle Interface
Module (VIM)
DLC1
(Check Connector)
Cable
Black
Grey
CAN Interface Module
DLC2
(TDCL)
Cable
CAN Interface Module Is Used for
ALL DLC3/J1962 Communication
The Original DLC3 (OBDII
Connector P/N 02001643)
Cable Is No Longer Used.
1. Remove the original DLC3 Cable and store it in the Diagnostic Tester storage case.
2. Connect the CAN Interface Module to the DLC Cable.
3. Use the Diagnostic Tester with the CAN Module installed for all DLC3/J1962 based
vehicle communication.
4. If you experience problems with the Diagnostic Tester or CAN Interface Module,
please contact Lexus Special Service Tool Customer Support at 1–800–933–8335.
NOTE:
S There is no need to remove the CAN Interface Module when working with non–CAN
systems or older software versions (Version 10.1a or earlier). The Diagnostic Tester
will communicate with all DLC3/J1962 based systems with the CAN Interface
Module installed.
S For DLC1 and DLC2 communication you must continue to use the Vehicle Interface
Module (VIM).
Page 2 of 2
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
1998 SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Models:
All 1997 and 1998 Models
June 26, 1998
Introduction
The following bulletin contains information regarding 1997 and 1998 Special Service
Tools (SSTs). All new SSTs are listed by tool number, name and model application. All
1998 Essential SSTs are automatically shipped to dealers.
S Special Service Tools may also be ordered by contacting OTC at 1–800–933–8335.
Affected
Vehicles
1998 Essential
Special
Service
Tools
S All 1997 and 1998 model year Lexus vehicles.
1998 ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
TOOL NUMBER
TOOL NAME
APPLICATION
01001895–U05
Scan Tool Software Update
> Support for 98MY vehicles: OBD,Enhanced OBD II, NVH, V–BOB & 5 Gas Analyzer
> Multiplex On–Board Diagnostic capability for:
1. Wireless Registration
2. Immobilizer Key Programming
3. ABS Air Bleed
> Expanded Help Functions
All models
02002456
Customize Program Card
(for Diagnostic Tester)
LS400, RX300,
GS300/400,
LX470
09843–18040
Diagnosis Check Wire No. 2
LS400,
GS300/400
09843–18050
Navigation Wire Harness No. 2
LS400,
GS300/400
09990–00450
ABS Actuator Checker Sub–Harness “P”
ES300,
SC300/400
LEX280103
Cellular Phone Antenna Connector
09870–00005–02 A/C Quick Joint Disconnect Set
1. 09870–00010 Storage Case
2. 09870–00015 High Side Tool
3. 09870–00025 Low Side Tool
09082–00705–02 Airbag Deployment Tool Kit:
Includes:
09082–00700 Deployment Tool
09082–00730 Airbag deployment sub–harness #1
09082–00740 Airbag deployment sub–harness #2 for seat belt pretensioner (NEW)
09082–00750 Airbag deployment sub–harness #3 for side airbag (NEW)
09082–00760 Airbag deployment sub–harness #4 for driver/passenger airbag (NEW)
TOY28015 Storage Case (NEW)
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
LS400
RX300, LX470
All models
Page 1 of 2
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
SS001–98
Title:
1998 SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS – SS001–98
1998 Essential
Special
Service
Tools
Continued
1998 Available
Special
Service
Tools
1997 Essential
Special
Service
Tools
June 26, 1998
1998 ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
TOOL NUMBER
09268–41300
TOOL NAME
Clamp for EFI Set
(add to kit 09268–41047–02)
LS400, ES300,
GS300, GS400,
SC300, SC400
1998 AVAILABLE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
TOOL NUMBER
TOOL NAME
02002455
V–BOB ECU Interface Box #6 for ABS and Engine Systems
02002454
ECU Connector Exchange Wire #10 for Cruise Control
00002–MP815–L
TOOL NAME
Battery Tester
LS400,
GS300/400,
ES300,
SC300/400
97–98 ES300
APPLICATION
All models
09950–60010
Bearing & Seal Driver Set 1
multiple
09950–60020
Bearing & Seal Driver Set 2
multiple
00950–70010
Handle Set
multiple
09990–00410
ABS Actuator Checker Sheet “N”
LS400, SC400
09990–00420
ABS Actuator Checker Sheet “O”
LS400,
SC300/400
09990–00430
ABS Actuator Checker Sheet “P”
ES300
09990–00450
ABS Actuator Checker Sub–harness “P”
09082–00730
Airbag Deployment Wire Sub–harness 1
09992–00350–01 ABS & TRAC Actuator Air Bleed Tool
09268–41250–01 EFI Fuel Pressure Gauge T–Joint
(Add to 09268–45015–02 Gauge Set)
Page 2 of 2
APPLICATION
1997 ESSENTIAL SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
TOOL NUMBER
09817–33190–01 Sensor Socket Wrench (for shocks)
1997 Available
Special
Service
Tools
APPLICATION
ES300, LS400,
SC400
LS400
ES300
LS400, SC400
All models
1997 AVAILABLE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
TOOL NUMBER
09710–04081
TOOL NAME
Base, front lower suspension arm bushing
APPLICATION
ES300
Technical Service
BULLETIN
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05)
Models:
All ’96 – ’03 & ’04 RX 330
December 17, 2003
Introduction
This Service Bulletin contains Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Monitor threshold values for all
models from 1996 to 2003 and some 2004 models. Starting in 2004, the O2S Monitor
threshold values can be found in the repair manual. These values are used when
analyzing the O2S test results to determine the O2S condition.
S All 1996 – 2003 model year Lexus vehicles.
S 2004 model year RX 330 vehicles.
Applicable
Vehicles
Function
Description
Checking O2S Test Results
To view O2S test results, the O2S Monitor must be completed and the test results must
be checked within the same key cycle. If the ignition key is cycled OFF, the O2S test
results will be set to the minimum or maximum limits, and all test results will be erased.
The O2S test results are stored in the ECU (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM)
when the monitor is complete. The test results are static and will not change once the
monitor is complete.
The process for checking O2S test results is described in the following three basic steps:
1. Completing the O2S Readiness Monitor (page 2).
2. Accessing O2S Test Results (page 3).
3. Comparing O2S Test Results to Failure Thresholds (page 4).
Required
SSTs
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SSTs)
Lexus Diagnostic Tester Kit*
(or any OBDII Scantool)
12 Megabyte Diagnostic Tester Program Card
with version 10.1a Software (or later)*
*
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
01001270
1
01002593-005
1
Essential SSTs.
NOTE:
Additional Diagnostic Tester Kits, Program Cards or other SSTs may be ordered by
calling SPX/OTC at 1-800-933-8335.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OFP
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Toyota Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 23
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
SS002-03
Title:
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
Completing
O2S
Readiness
Monitor
December 17, 2003
1. Clear any stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) using the Lexus Diagnostic Tester.
2. Start the engine.
3. Perform the drive pattern below to run and complete the Oxygen Sensor
(O2S) Monitor.
O2S Monitor Drive Pattern
ECT: 167rF (75rC) or more
Accelerator Pedal
Depressing
At Least Twice
At Least 8 Times
Vehicle Speed
Accelerator Pedal
Releasing (Fuel–Cut)
48 km/h (30 mph)
6 mph
(10 km/h)
Idling
Time
2 min.
or more
40 sec
or more
20 sec
or more
10 sec
or more
10 sec
or more
HINT:
The O2S Monitor is completed when the following conditions are met:
S Two (2) minutes or more passed after the engine start.
S The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is 167rF (75rC) or more.
S Cumulative running time at 30 mph (48 km/h) or more exceeds 6 minutes.
S Vehicle is in closed loop.
S The fuel–cut is operated for 8 seconds or more (for Rear O2S Monitor).
A. Allow the engine to idle for two minutes.
B. Warm up the engine until the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) reaches 167rF
(75rC).
C. Drive the vehicle over 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 40 seconds.
D. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for more than 20 seconds.
E. Repeat steps C and D at least 8 times in one driving cycle.
(Do not cycle the ignition key.)
In addition, perform the following steps for the Rear O2S Readiness Monitor:
A. Select second gear.
B. Allow the vehicle to run at 30 mph (48 km/h) or more.
C. Keep the accelerator pedal “off–idle” for more than 10 seconds.
D. Immediately after step C, release the accelerator pedal for at least 10 seconds
without depressing the brake pedal (to execute the fuel–cut).
E. Decelerate the vehicle until the vehicle speed reaches less than 6 mph (10 km/h).
F. Repeat steps B – E at least twice in one driving cycle.
Page 2 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
Accessing
O2S Test
Results
1. On the Diagnostic Tester* screen,
select the following menus:
S DIAGNOSTICS
S CARB OBD II
S O2S TEST RESULTS
A list of the available oxygen sensors
will be displayed.
December 17, 2003
O2S TEST RESULT Screen
01 BANK 1 – SENSOR 1
01 BANK 1 – SENSOR 2
01 BANK 2 – SENSOR 1
01 BANK 2 – SENSOR 2
2. Select the desired oxygen sensor and
press Enter.
NOTE:
The monitor result of the A/F sensor will
not be displayed. If you select
“Bank 1–Sensor 1” or Bank 2–Sensor 1”
for a vehicle equipped with an A/F
sensor, the Diagnostic Tester will
display “No parameter to display.”
3. Compare the test results with the
values listed in the Failure
Threshold Chart.
TEST DATA Screen
LOW SW V S S S S 0.400 V
HIGH SW V S S S S 0.550 V
MIN O2S V S S S S
0.100 V
MAX O2S V S S S S 0.900 V
TIME $81 S S S S S
*
17
Although this procedure references the Lexus
Diagnostic Tester, the O2S test results can be
checked using a generic OBDII scantool.
Refer to your OBDII scantool operator’s manual
for specific procedures.
Page 3 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
Comparing
O2S Test
Results to
Failure
Thresholds
December 17, 2003
1. Determine the correct O2S Failure Threshold Chart for your vehicle by looking in the
“O2S Application Table,” pages 5 – 6 in this bulletin.
2. Select appropriate year, model, and engine for specified O2S Failure
Threshold Chart.
3. Compare O2S test results with the specified O2S Failure Threshold Chart. It may be
necessary to convert O2S test results to a specific measurement unit using the
conversion factor that is supplied in the specified table. See example below:
Example:
Example
A. The Diagnostic Tester displays
“17” as a value of the “Time $81”
(see illustration).
B. Find the Conversion Factor value
of “Time $81” in the O2S Failure
Threshold chart below.
0.3906 is specified for Time $81
in this chart.
C. Multiply “17” in step “A” by 0.3906
(Conversion Factor) in step “B.”
17 x 0.3906 = 6.6 %
D. If the answer is within the
Standard Value of TEST LIMIT,
the “Time $81” can be confirmed
to be normal.
LOW SW V S S S S
HIGH SW V S S S S
MIN O2S V S S S S
MAX O2S V S S S S
Time $81
Time $84
Time $85
0.400 V
0.550 V
0.035 V
0.835 V
17
84
79
NOTE:
S “LOW SW V” indicates the O2S
voltage when the O2S status changes
from rich to lean.
S “HIGH SW V” indicates the O2S
voltage when the O2S status changes
from lean to rich.
S If the O2S voltage is lower than
“LOW SW V,” the O2S status is lean.
S If the O2S voltage is higher than
“HIGH SW V,” the O2S status is rich.
Example of O2S Failure Threshold Chart:
TEST ID
Time
$81
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05V
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
Multiply 0.3906
%
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Within 60%
NOTE:
Before the O2S Monitor completes or after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the
Diagnostic Tester displays the viewable upper limit or a lower limit of the test value
(example: 0 V, 1.275 V, 0 s [seconds], 10.2 s, 0 and 255).
Page 4 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S
Application
Table
CERTIFICATION
SEE CHART NO.
(TSB PAGE)
ALL
50–State
1 (p. 7)
ALL
50–State
1 (p. 7)
California
3 (p. 9)
Federal
1 (p. 7)
MODEL YEAR
MODEL
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
December 17, 2003
ENGINE
ES 300
1MZ FE
1MZ–FE
GS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
GS 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
LS 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
LX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
SC 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
SC 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
ES 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
GS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
GS 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
LS 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
LX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
RX 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
SC 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
SC 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
ES 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
GS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
GS 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
LS 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
LX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
RX 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
SC 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
SC 400
1UZ–FE
50–State
ES 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
GS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
GS 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
IS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
LS 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
LX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
RX 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
2 (p.
(p 8)
3 (p. 9)
2 (p.
(p 8)
3 (p. 9)
2 (p.
(p 8)
3 (p. 9)
2 (p.
(p 8)
3 (p. 9)
2 (p.
(p 8)
3 (p. 9)
1 (p. 7)
4 (p. 9)
Page 5 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S
Application
Table
(Continued)
MODEL YEAR
2002
2003
2004
Page 6 of 23
December 17, 2003
MODEL
ENGINE
CERTIFICATION
SEE CHART NO.
(TSB PAGE)
ES 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
8 (p. 13)
GS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
5 (p. 10)
GS 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
6 (p. 11)
IS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
5 (p. 10)
LS 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
6 (p. 11)
LX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
7 (p. 12)
RX 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
13 (p. 22)
SC 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
6 (p. 11)
ES 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
8 (p. 13)
GS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
9 (p. 14–15)
GS 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
10 (p. 16–17)
GX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
11 (p. 18–19)
IS 300
2JZ–GE
50–State
9 (p. 14–15)
LS 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
10 (p. 16–17)
LX 470
2UZ–FE
50–State
12 (p. 20–21)
RX 300
1MZ–FE
50–State
13 (p. 22)
SC 430
3UZ–FE
50–State
10 (p. 16–17)
RX 330
3MZ–FE
50–State
14 (p. 23)
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
December 17, 2003
CHART 1:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during O2S
monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
1 second
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≥0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
1 second
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during O2S
monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 7 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 2:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and
0.35 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.35 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
1.1 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≥0.35 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
1.1 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 8 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 3:
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and
0.45 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.6 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
CHART 4:
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.5 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.6 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 9 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 5:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 80%
(A/T)
Between 0 and 90%
(M/T)
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 10 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 6:
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 60%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 11 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 7:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 90%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 12 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 8:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.5 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.6 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 95%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 13 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 9:
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
1 second
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
1 second
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Engine Idling
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
Time
$33
Time
$34
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
N/A
Bank 1:
Between 0 and
3.45 seconds
Second
Bank 2:
Between 0 and
3.7 seconds
N/A
Bank 1:
Between 0 and
3.45 seconds
Second
Bank 2:
Between 0 and
3.7 seconds
If the sum of Time $33 and Time $34 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Page 14 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 9 (Continued):
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Vehicle Running
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
Time
$35
Time
$36
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
CONVERSION
FACTOR
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
UNIT
N/A
Bank 1:
Between 0 and
0.73 seconds
Bank 2:
Second Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
(varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
N/A
Bank 1:
Between 0 and
0.73 seconds
Bank 2:
Second Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
(varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
If the sum of Time $35 and Time $36 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 90%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 15 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 10:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Engine Idling
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$33
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
3 seconds
Time
$34
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
3 seconds
If the sum of Time $33 and Time $34 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Page 16 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 10 (Continued):
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Engine Idling
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
Time
$35
Time
$36
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
CONVERSION
FACTOR
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
UNIT
N/A
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
Second (varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
N/A
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
Second (varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
If the sum of Time $35 and Time $36 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 60%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 17 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 11:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Engine Idling
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$33
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
2.8 seconds
Time
$34
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
2.8 seconds
If the sum of Time $33 and Time $34 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Page 18 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 11 (Continued):
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Vehicle Running
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
Time
$35
Time
$36
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
CONVERSION
FACTOR
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
UNIT
N/A
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
Second (varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
N/A
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
Second (varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
If the sum of Time $35 and Time $36 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.05 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 60%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≤0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 19 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 12:
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and P2198
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.55 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Response Monitor
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$31
Time to change from Lean
(≤0.4 V) to Rich (≥0.55 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
Time
$32
Time to change from Rich
(≥0.55 V) to Lean (≤0.4 V)
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
0.9 seconds
If the time required to change is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Engine Idling
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$33
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
2.8 seconds
Time
$34
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
N/A
Second
Between 0 and
2.8 seconds
If the sum of Time $33 and Time $34 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Page 20 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 12 (Continued):
Front O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 1 and Bank 2 Sensor 1) Frequency Monitor During
Vehicle Running
Related DTCs: P0133 and P0153
TEST ID
Time
$35
Time
$36
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
Average Lean (≤0.4 V) time of
one waveform cycle
Average Rich (≥0.55 V) time of
one waveform cycle
CONVERSION
FACTOR
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
UNIT
N/A
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
Second (varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
N/A
Between 0 and
0.75 seconds
Second (varies depending
on feedback
compensation factor)
If the sum of Time $35 and Time $36 is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.5 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 90%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≥0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 21 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 13:
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and 0.4 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.6 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.5 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 60%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≥0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 22 of 23
O2S TEST RESULTS (MODE 05) – SS002-03
O2S Failure
Threshold
Charts
(Continued)
December 17, 2003
CHART 14:
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Voltage Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$07
The minimum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0 and
0.45 V
Time
$08
The maximum voltage during
O2S monitoring
N/A
V
Between 0.5 and
1.275 V
If the sensor voltage is out of the standard value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction.
Rear O2S (Bank 1 Sensor 2 and Bank 2 Sensor 2) Element Monitor
Related DTCs: P0136 and P0156
TEST ID
DESCRIPTION OF TEST DATA
CONVERSION
FACTOR
UNIT
STANDARD VALUE
OF TEST LIMIT
Time
$81
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
less than 0.5 V
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 0 and 80%
Time
$84
Percentage of monitoring time
where Oxygen Sensor voltage is
0.70 V or more
Multiply 0.3906
%
Between 20 and
100%
Time
$85
Maximum Rich (≥0.45 V) time
Multiply 0.2621
Second
Between 20 and
66.8 seconds
If all the values (Time $81, Time $84 and Time $85) are out of the standard values, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction.
Page 23 of 23
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
Models:
All Models & Model Years Through Current
June 7, 2002
Introduction
The internal software of the Midtronics Battery Tester can now be periodically updated to
support future models. New updates will include new battery warranty codes and testing
information.
The Technical Information System (TIS) will be the primary distribution method for battery
tester software updates. Utilizing the new Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) and the new
essential SST (Midtronics Battery Tester Adapter), you will be able to quickly and easily
update your Midtronics Battery Tester.
This bulletin will show you how to use and install the Midtronics Update Wizard to update
the Midtronics tester software.
S All models and model years through current.
Applicable
Vehicles
Required
Tools &
Material
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SSTs)
Midtronics Battery Tester*
Midtronics Battery Tester Adapter*
*
Warranty
Information
Process
Overview
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
00002–MP815–L
1
00002–DMPUC
1
Essential SSTs.
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
The Midtronics Battery Tester Software Update is a 2-step process:
1. Installing the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).
The Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) is an application that only needs to be installed
on the PC one time. This bulletin will provide the steps to install the MUW.
2. Using the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).
The Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) will be used with each battery tester software
update. The Update Wizard will walk you through each step to connect the PC to the
tester and perform the update.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 10
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
SS002-02
Title:
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure:
Preparation
June 7, 2002
Before Installation or Use of the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW):
Steps A and B are required to begin the update process. (Refer to Figure 1.)
A. Open TIS (Technical Information System) and go to the “Diagnostics” section.
B. Click on the text “Midtronics Battery Tester Software.”
FIGURE 1.
B
A
Page 2 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
June 7, 2002
1. Installing the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).
NOTE:
The Midtronics Update Wizard only needs to be installed once and must be installed
before the rest of the update process can take place. If this step is already complete,
continue on to step 2.
A. Click on the text “Install MUW.” (Figure 2.)
B. The file download window will appear. Click on “Run this program from it’s current
location.”
C. Click the “OK” button.
D. Allow the Update Wizard to perform its self–installation. This will take only a few
minutes.
FIGURE 2.
A
B
C
Page 3 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
2. Using the Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW).
A. Click on the latest version of production software. (Figure 3.) This will begin the
software update process.
B. The next screen to appear will be the first screen of the software update. Click
“Next” to continue.
FIGURE 3.
A
B
Page 4 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
C. Enter the serial number of the battery tester then click “OK.” (Figure 4.)
FIGURE 4.
C
Page 5 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
D. Connect the Midtronics Battery Tester to TIS as instructed (Figure 5), then click
“Next.”
NOTE:
Connecting the Midtronics Battery Tester to the TIS station will require the use of SST
00002–DMPUC. This is an adapter that allows the TIS RS–232 cable to plug into the
Battery Tester. (Figure 5.)
FIGURE 5.
D
Page 6 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
E. Follow the instructions to put the Midtronics Battery Tester into the correct mode
(Figure 6), then click “Next.”
FIGURE 6.
E
Page 7 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
F. Confirm the software version and click “Next.” (Figure 7.)
FIGURE 7.
F
Figures 7–1 and 7–2 are confirmation dialogs that will pop up over the Update
Information window (Figure 7) when:
S The update file is an older revision level than that found in the battery tester
(Figure 7–1) or
S The update file is the same revision level as that found in the tester
(Figure 7–2).
Click the “Yes” button to clear the pop–up dialog and continue with the update.
FIGURE 7–1.
Page 8 of 10
FIGURE 7–2.
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
G. The Midtronics Update Wizard (MUW) will now update the Midtronics Battery
Tester software. (Figure 8.)
NOTE:
Do not interrupt this process (it will take approximately 5 minutes).
FIGURE 8.
Page 9 of 10
MIDTRONICS BATTERY TESTER SOFTWARE UPDATE – SS002-02
Operation
Procedure
(Continued)
June 7, 2002
H. Upon successful completion, the Update Results screen will display “No errors”
and the update is now complete. Click on the “Exit” button. (Figure 9.)
FIGURE 9.
H
Your Midtronics Battery Tester is now updated and ready for use.
NOTE:
BE SURE TO REGULARLY CHECK TIS FOR FUTURE UPDATES:
S The Midtronics Battery Tester OE Stock Number Card will no longer be printed and
shipped. It will be distributed through TIS from now on.
S Latest versions of Tester update software will be available on TIS.
Page 10 of 10
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
December 8, 2000
Introduction
Applicable
Diagnostic
Testers
Repair
Procedure
DIAGNOSTIC TESTER COMMUNICATION
ERROR WITH T.I.S.
Models:
All Models
Certain Diagnostic Testers (SST P/N 02002019) may experience a communication
error with the Technical Information System (T.I.S.). To correct this condition, the tester
manufacturer, Vetronix Corporation, will recall and update affected units. The following
explains how to determine which Diagnostic Testers may exhibit this problem and
outlines the procedure to return the tester for repair.
Diagnostic Testers within the serial number range below are known to experience these
communication errors.
STARTING SERIAL NUMBER
ENDING SERIAL NUMBER
31 000000
31 000100
1. Determine the Diagnostic Tester serial
number located on the back of the tester
(see Figure 1).
Figure 1
Back View of Diagnostic Tester
2. If the serial number is within the range
listed above, call Vetronix Toyota
Customer Service at 1-800-321-4889,
ext. 3123, to obtain a pre-paid shipping
package for the Diagnostic Tester.
3. The shipping package will arrive within
2 business days. Secure the tester in
the provided package following the
enclosed shipping instructions.
S/N 31 000100
Diagnostic Testers are guaranteed to be
returned within 3 business days from
receipt at Vetronix (except over
holidays).
NOTE:
This update will be performed
free of charge.
Diagnostic Testers outside of the serial number range above are not affected and do not need
this repair. If a Diagnostic Tester outside this range experiences a similar problem, please call
Dealer Daily Support at 1-877-DL-DAILY or Vetronix Toyota Customer Service at
1-800-321-4889, ext. 3123.
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
SS003-00
Title:
Models:
All Applicable Models
February 16, 2001
To make the steering wheel installation procedure similar for all models, the steering
wheel nut tightening torque has been standardized.
Applicable
Vehicles
MODEL
MODEL YEARS
LS 400
UCF10, 20
1990 – 2000
SC 400/300
JZZ31, UZZ30
1992 – 2000
GS 400/300
JZS147, 160, UZS160
1993 – 2000
ES 300
MCV10, 20
1994 – 2000
LX 450
FZJ80
1996 – 1997
LX 470
UZJ100
1998 – 2000
RX 300
MCU10, 15
1999 – 2000
IS 300
JCE10
2001
Service
Information
Steering Wheel
Installation Nut
Steering Wheel Pad
35 NSm (360 kgfScm, 26 ftSlbf)
50 NSm (510 kgfScm, 37 ftSlbf)
Steering Wheel
Lower
No. 2 Cover
Steering Wheel
Steering Column
Warranty
Information
Steering Wheel
Lower
No. 3 Cover
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
STEERING
STEERING WHEEL NUT SERVICE
SPECIFICATION
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
Introduction
ST001-01
Title:
REF:
STEERING
NO:
ST001–96
DATE:
MARCH 22, 1996
MODEL: ALL MODELS
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Page 1 of 4
Anytime the steering gear is removed on a vehicle equipped with an SRS airbag, the steering wheel must
also be removed. Use of the following steps for reinstallation and re–centering of the steering wheel will
prevent possible damage to the spiral cable.
REQUIRED STEPS FOR STEERING GEAR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION:
Removal:
D Place front wheels facing straight ahead.
D
Remove the steering wheel pad.
D
Remove the steering wheel.
Installation:
D
Place front wheels facing straight ahead.
D
Center the spiral cable.
D
Install the steering wheel.
D
Install the steering wheel pad.
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL PROCEDURES:
Follow the steps below to remove the steering wheel, before removing the steering gear, from
the vehicle.
1.
Place front wheels in the straight ahead position.
2.
With ignition switch in lock position, disconnect the negative terminal of the battery.
3.
Remove Steering wheel pad.
NOTICE: If the airbag connector is disconnected with the ignition switch at “ON” or “ACC,” a
“Diagnostic Trouble Code” will be recorded.
Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, replace with new
parts.
a.
Remove the steering wheel lower cover.
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Page 2 of 4
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL PROCEDURES (CONT’D):
b. Using a torx socket wrench, loosen
the torx screws until the groove along
the screw circumference catches on
the screw case. SST 09042–00010.
(See Fig. 1)
Torx Screw
Screw Case
c. Pull the wheel pad away from the
steering wheel and disconnect the
airbag connector. (See Fig. 2)
CAUTION:
When storing the wheel pad,
keep the upper surface of the
pad facing up.
Fig. 1
Airbag Connector
Never disassemble the
wheel pad.
NOTICE:
When removing the wheel pad,
take care not to pull the airbag
wiring harness.
4. Remove the steering wheel.
a. Disconnect the spiral cable
connector.
Fig. 2
b. Remove the wheel set nut.
c. Place matchmarks on the wheel and
steering main shaft. (See Fig. 3)
Matchmarks
d. Using the appropriate SST, remove
the wheel. SST 09950–50010 (set
includes 09951–05010,
09952–05010, 09953–05020,
09954–05020)
SST
For further disassembly of the steering column,
refer to the Steering (SR) section of the Repair
Manual.
Fig. 3
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES:
Follow the steps below to install the steering wheel, after installing the steering gear.
1.
Place front wheels in the straight ahead position.
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Page 3 of 4
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES (Cont’d):
2. Center spiral cable.
a. Turn the cable counterclockwise by hand until
it becomes harder to turn.
b. Then rotate the cable clockwise about 2.5 or 3
turns to align the marks. (See Fig. 4)
NOTE:
The number of turns clockwise varies by
model. See the “SR” section of the
vehicle’s repair manual for the
information.
Red Mark
Fig. 4
3. Install the steering wheel.
a. Align the matchmarks on the wheel and
steering main shaft.
b. Temporarily tighten the wheel set nut.
c. Connect the spiral cable connector.
4. Bleed Power Steering System (when applicable).
5. Check steering wheel center point.
6. Torque steering wheel set nut. See the applicable
vehicle’s repair manual for the torque
specification.
7. Install steering wheel pad.
NOTICE: Make Sure the pad is centered and installed to the specified torque.
If the pad has been dropped, or there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case
or connector, replace the wheel pad with a new one.
When installing the pad, take care that the wiring does not interfere with other parts
and is not pinched between other parts.
a. Connect the airbag wiring connector.
Torx Screw
Screw Case
b. Install the pad after confirming that
torx screws are in the screw case.
c. Using a torx socket, torque the
screws to the specification in the
vehicle’s repair manual.
SST 09042–00010.
(See Fig. 5)
d. Install the steering wheel lower cover.
Fig. 5
STEERING GEAR/STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Page 4 of 4
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS):
SSTs
TOOL NUMBER
TOOL NAME
09950–50010
Puller C Set
09951–05010
Hanger 150
09952–05010
Slide Arm
09953–05020
Center Bolt 150
09954–05020
Claw No. 2
APPLICATION
Power tilt/power
telescoping steering
column
RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND NECESSARY EQUIPMENT:
TOOL
TOOL NUMBER
09042–00010
EQUIPMENT: Torque Wrench
LUBRICANT: ATF DEXRON II or III
TOOL NAME
APPLICATION
Torx Socket T 30
Steering wheel pad
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
STEERING WHEEL NUT
Models:
’94 – ’00 ES 300
May 26, 2000
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
STEERING
ST004–00
Title:
The steering wheel installation nut torque specification has been changed. Please update
the repair manuals for the applicable vehicles.
S 1994 – 2000 model year ES 300
50 N m (510 kgf cm, 37 ft lbf)
Warranty
Information
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
August 14, 1998
Introduction
STEERING RACK HOUSING BUSHING
NOISE
Models:
’97 ES 300
The Steering Rack Bushing on 1997 ES 300 vehicles has been changed to reduce noise
from the Rack Housing Bracket No. 2.
Rack Housing Bolt
Tie Rod End
Power Steering
Gear Assembly
Boot
Rack Housing
No. 2 Bushing
Production
Change
Information
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
Rack Housing No.
2 Bracket
S 1997 ES 300s starting with VIN: JT8BF22G * V0001068
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
45517–33010
45517–33021
Steering Rack Housing Bushing No. 2
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
ST8002
Replace Steering Rack No. 2 Bushing
1.0
45517–33010
T1
T2
91 99
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 2
STEERING
ST004–98
Title:
STEERING RACK HOUSING GROMMET BUSHING NOISE – ST004–98
Repair
Procedure
August 14, 1998
If the customer encounters noise in cold weather, when turning, at very low speed (2–3
mph), replace the Rack Housing Bushing with the updated part.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the Steering Rack to replace the bushing.
To remove the Rack Housing Bushing:
1. Remove the No. 2 Rack Housing Bolt.
2. Place matchmarks on the tie rod and
rack end so that the toe will not be
changed.
Remove the Tie Rod End.
Matchmarks
3. Remove the Rack Boot, using a
screwdriver to loosen the clamp. Be
careful not to damage the boot.
4. Remove and replace the Bushing. Be
sure to align the projection on the
bushing with the hole in the bracket.
5. Reassemble the Rack Boot using a
new clamp (P/N 90461–08688).
6. Road test the vehicle to make sure
steering wheel is on center.
Page 2 of 2
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
REAR ABS SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL
Models:
’97 – ’00 ES 300
May 5, 2000
Introduction
This bulletin provides service information regarding the removal of the ABS speed sensor
prior to removal of the rear axle and rear suspension.
REMINDER:
Failure to remove the ABS speed sensor prior to removal of the rear axle or
suspension may cause the ABS warning light to illuminate or damage the ABS speed
sensor wire harness.
Applicable
Vehicles
S 1997 – 2000 model year ES 300
Repair
Procedure
POTENTIAL ARE FOR DAMAGE
5.4 NSm (55 kgfScm, 48 inSlbf)
7.8 NSm (80 kgfScm, 69 inSlbf)
REAR ABS SPEED SENSOR
NOTE:
Prior to removal/replacement of the rear axle, rear coil spring and rear shock absorber,
be sure to remove the rear ABS speed sensor from the rear axle by removing the 3
bolts shown above. Check the speed sensor signal after installation.
Warranty
Information
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
SUSPENSION
SU001–00
Title:
FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT NOISE
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
Models:
’97–’00 ES 300 & ’99–’00 RX 300
December 10, 1999
Introduction
Applicable
Vehicles
Production
Change
Information
To eliminate a noise occurrence from the front suspension on washboard type road
surfaces, the suspension support has been changed.
S 1997 – 2000 Model Year ES 300 and 1999 – 2000 Model Year RX 300.
The rubber bushing shape of the
suspension support has been changed.
Suspension
Support
NOTE:
This change is not applicable to
“Adaptive Variable Suspension”
equipped ES 300 vehicles.
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
Coil Spring
MODEL
STARTING VIN
ES 300
JT8BF28G*Y0237725
JT8BF28G*Y5075984
RX 300
JT6GF10U*Y0045378
JT6HF10U*Y0097408
Strut
PREVIOUS PART NUMBER
CURRENT PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY
48603–33020
48603–33021
Support Sub–Assembly,
Front Suspension RH
1
48609–33120
48609–33121
Support Sub–Assembly,
Front Suspension LH
1
ES 300
OP CODE
COMBO
A
431451
B
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
R & R Front Suspension Support
Assembly (RH and LH)
Adjust Toe–in
1.6
48603–3302
0
91
99
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
R & R Front Suspension Support
Assembly (RH and LH)
Adjust Toe–in
2.0
48603–3302
0
91
99
RX 300
OP CODE
COMBO
431451
A
B
Applicable Warranty*:
This repair is covered under the Lexus Basic Warranty. This warranty is in effect for
48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle’s in–service date.
* Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer’s specific complaint.
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
SUSPENSION
SU002–99
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
April 9, 1999
Introduction
REVISED DRIVE SHAFT GREASE
Models:
LS 400, GS 300/400, SC 300/400, ES 250/300 &
RX 300
The greases supplied in replacement Inboard and Outboard Drive Shaft Boot Kits for the
following models, has been revised.
With this revision, the grease compositions have been changed and are now both the
same color. To correctly lubricate each joint, consult the Service Repair Manual as to
which size packet of grease is designated for each Drive Shaft Joint Assembly.
NOTE:
Although Inboard and Outboard greases are now the same color, their compositions
are different.
Affected
Vehicles
S All LS 400, GS 300/400, SC 300/400, ES 250/300 & RX 300 Models.
Required
Tools and
Material
As outlined in the Service Repair Manual.
Repair
Procedure
Refer to the appropriate Repair Manual for installation and lubrication information for
Drive Shaft Joint Assemblies.
Warranty
Information
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
TRANSMISSION & CLUTCH
TC001–99
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
June 19, 1998
Introduction
Affected
Vehicles
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
TYPE T-IV
Models:
All Models
The introduction of Automatic Transmission Fluid type T–IV makes type T–II obsolete.
Use type T–IV for all applications that specify ATF type T–II.
S All vehicles with Automatic Transmissions specified to use ATF Types T–II or T–IV.
TYPE OF ATF
Dextron–III
TYPE T
TYPE T–II
TYPE T–IV
OK
X
X
X
TYPE T
X
OK
X
X
TYPE T–II
X
X
OK
OK
TYPE T–IV
X
X
X
OK
SPECIFIED ATF
Dextron–II
or III
X = NOT USABLE
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
SIZE
NEW PART NUMBER
PART NAME
4 Liter
08886–01705
ATF type T–IV
OP CODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
TRANSMISSION & CLUTCH
TC003–98
Title:
Technical Service
Information Bulletin
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS
Models:
All Models
September 10, 1999
REVISION NOTICE:
The information contained in this TSIB updates TC003–98 dated June 19, 1998.
Introduction
Automatic Transmission Fluid Type T–IV now replaces Type T–II fluid. Use Type T–IV for
all applications that specify ATF Type T–II.
Please refer to the following table for the interchangeability between each ATF.
Applicable
Vehicles
S All vehicles produced after 1990 with Automatic Transmissions specified to use
ATF Type T, T–II and T–IV.
TYPE OF ATF
SPECIFIED ATF
DEXRON® II OR III
TYPE T
TYPE T–II
TYPE T–IV
DEXRON® II OR III
OK
X
X
X
TYPE T
X
OK
X
OK
TYPE T–II
X
X
OK
OK
TYPE T–IV
X
X
X
OK
X = NOT USABLE
NOTICE:
With the exception of mixing ATF Type T with Type T–IV fluids, different types of fluids
must not be mixed.
Parts
Information
Warranty
Information
SIZE
NEW PART NUMBER
PART NAME
4 Liter
08886–01705
ATF Type T–IV
OPCODE
DESCRIPTION
TIME
OPN
T1
T2
N/A
Not Applicable to Warranty
–
–
–
–
Lexus Supports ASE Certification
Page 1 of 1
TRANSMISSION & CLUTCH
TC003–99
Title:
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement